Professional Documents
Culture Documents
CHEd-DepEd-Precalculus-TG v2 06012016 PDF
CHEd-DepEd-Precalculus-TG v2 06012016 PDF
PY
Teacher’s Guide
O
C
This Teacher’s Guide was developed by the Commission
D
on Higher Education (CHED) in collaboration with content and
teaching experts from universities, colleges, basic education,
and other academic institutions and was donated to the
E
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Precalculus
Teacher’s Guide
First Edition 2016
Republic Act 8293. Section 176 states that: No copyright shall subsist in any work
of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or
office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit.
Such agency or office may, among other things, impose as a condition the payment of
royalties.
Borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand names,
trademarks, etc.) included in this learning resource are owned by their respective copyright
holders. DepEd is represented by the Filipinas Copyright Licensing Society (FILCOLS), Inc.
in seeking permission to use these materials from their respective copyright owners. All
means have been exhausted in seeking permission to use these materials. The publisher
PY
and authors do not represent nor claim ownership over them.
Only institutions and companies which have entered an agreement with FILCOLS
and only within the agreed framework may copy from this Teacher’s Guide. Those who
have not entered in an agreement with FILCOLS must, if they wish to copy, contact the
publishers and authors directly.
O
Authors and publishers may email or contact FILCOLS at filcols@gmail.com or (02)
435-5258, respectively.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Table of Contents
PY
Unit 1: Analytic Geometry (19 one-hour sessions) 6
O
1.1.2: Definition and Equation of a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.3: More Properties of Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
C
1.1.4: Situational Problems Involving Circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
iii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1.6: Systems of Nonlinear Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.6.1: Review of Techniques in Solving Systems of Linear
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.6.2: Solving Systems of Equations Using Substitution . . . . . . . . . 69
1.6.3: Solving Systems of Equations Using Elimination . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.6.4: Applications of Systems of Nonlinear Equations . . . . . . . . . . 76
PY
Lesson 2.2: Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2.2.1: Writing and Evaluating Sums in Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . 87
2.2.2: Properties of Sigma Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
O
Lesson 2.3: Principle of Mathematical Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.3.1: Proving Summation Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
C
2.3.2: Proving Divisibility Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
? 2.3.3: Proving Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
D
Lesson 2.4: The Binomial Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.4.1: Pascal’s Triangle and the Concept of Combination . . . . . . . . 109
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 3.3: Graphs of Circular Functions and Situational
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3.3.1: Graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3.3.2: Graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.3.3: Graphs of y = a sin b(x − c) + d and
y = a cos b(x − c) + d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.3.4: Graphs of Cosecant and Secant Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.3.5: Graphs of Tangent and Cotangent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.3.6: Simple Harmonic Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
PY
Lesson 3.4: Fundamental Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.4.1: Domain of an Expression or Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
3.4.2: Identity and Conditional Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
O
3.4.3: The Fundamental Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.4.4: Proving Trigonometric Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
C
Lesson 3.5: Sum and Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3.5.1: The Cosine Difference and Sum Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3.5.2: The Cofunction Identities and the Sine Sum and
D
Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.5.3: The Tangent Sum and Difference Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 3.9: Polar Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3.9.1: Polar Coordinates of a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
3.9.2: From Polar to Rectangular, and Vice Versa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3.9.3: Basic Polar Graphs and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
References 305
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
About This Teaching Guide
The Precalculus course bridges basic mathematics and calculus. This course
completes the foundational knowledge on algebra, geometry, and trigonometry of
students who are planning to take courses in the STEM track. It provides them
with conceptual understanding and computational skills that are prerequisites
for Basic Calculus and future STEM courses.
Based on the Curriculum Guide for Precalculus of the Department of Edu-
cation (see pages 2-5), the primary aim of this Teaching Guide is to give math
teachers an adequate stand-alone material that can be used for each session of
PY
the Grade 11 Precalculus course.
The Guide is divided into three units: analytic geometry, summation notation
and mathematical induction, and trigonometry. Each unit is composed of lessons
that bring together related learning competencies in the unit. Each lesson is
further divided into sub-lessons that focus on one or two competencies for effective
O
teaching and learning. Each sub-lesson is designed for a one-hour session, but the
teachers have the option to extend the time allotment to one-and-a-half hours for
C
some sub-lessons.
Each sub-lesson ends with a Seatwork/Homework, which consists of exercises
related to the topic being discussed in the sub-lesson. As the title suggests, these
exercises can be done in school (if time permits) or at home. Moreover, at the
D
end of each lesson is a set of exercises (simply tagged as Exercises) that can be
used for short quizzes and long exams. Answers, solutions, or hints to most items
E
Some items are marked with a star. A starred sub-lesson means the discussion
and accomplishment of the sub-lesson are optional. This will be decided by your
teacher. On the other hand, a starred example or exercise means the use of
calculator is required.
D
To further guide the teachers, Teaching Notes are provided on the margins.
These notes include simple recall of basic definitions and theorems, suggested
teaching methods, alternative answers to some exercises, quick approaches and
techniques in solving particular problems, and common errors committed by stu-
dents.
We hope that Precalculus teachers will find this Teaching Guide helpful and
convenient to use. We encourage the teachers to study this Guide carefully and
solve the exercises themselves. Although great effort has been put into this Guide
for technical correctness and precision, any mistake found and reported to the
Team is a gain for other teachers. Thank you for your cooperation.
The Precalculus Team
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
CONTENT LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE
EP
STANDARDS STANDARDS
Analytic The learners The learners shall be able The learners...
Geometry demonstrate an to...
understanding
of...
E 1. illustrate the different types of conic sections: parabola, ellipse,
circle, hyperbola, and degenerate cases.***
STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
2
key concepts of
appropriately and solve
problems accurately using
D 3. determine the standard form of equation of a circle STEM_PC11AG-Ia-3
conic sections and conic sections and systems 4. graph a circle in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Ia-4
systems of of nonlinear equations 5. define a parabola STEM_PC11AG-Ia-5
nonlinear 6. determine the standard form of equation of a parabola STEM_PC11AG-Ib-1
equations 7.
8.
C
graph a parabola in a rectangular coordinate system
define an ellipse
STEM_PC11AG-Ib-2
STEM_PC11AG-Ic-1
9. determine the standard form of equation of an ellipse STEM_PC11AG-Ic-2
10. graph an ellipse in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Ic-3
11.
12.
O
define a hyperbola
determine the standard form of equation of a hyperbola
STEM_PC11AG-Id-1
STEM_PC11AG-Id-2
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
K to 12 Senior High School STEM Specialized Subject – Pre-Calculus December 2013 Page 1 of 4
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
CONTENT LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE
STANDARDS STANDARDS
D 13. graph a hyperbola in a rectangular coordinate system STEM_PC11AG-Id-3
14. recognize the equation and important characteristics of the
STEM_PC11AG-Ie-1
different types of conic sections
15. solves situational problems involving conic sections STEM_PC11AG-Ie-2
3
induction and the mathematical statements 3. use the sigma notation to represent a series STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-3
Binomial and prove them using
D 4. illustrate the Principle of Mathematical Induction STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-4
Theorem. mathematical induction 5. apply mathematical induction in proving identities STEM_PC11SMI-Ih-i-1
and/or Binomial Theorem. 6. illustrate Pascal’s Triangle in the expansion of 𝑥 + 𝑦 𝑛 for small
STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-2
positive integral values of 𝑛
7. prove the Binomial Theorem STEM_PC11SMI-Ii-3
8.
C
determine any term of 𝑥 + 𝑦 𝑛 , where 𝑛 is a positive integer,
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-1
without expanding
9. solve problems using mathematical induction and the Binomial
STEM_PC11SMI-Ij-2
O
Theorem
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
K to 12 Senior High School STEM Specialized Subject – Pre-Calculus December 2013 Page 2 of 4
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
CONTENT PERFORMANCE
CONTENT LEARNING COMPETENCIES CODE
STANDARDS STANDARDS
Trigonometry key concepts of 1. formulate and solve 1. illustrate the unit circle and the relationship between the linear
circular functions, accurately situational and angular measures of a central angle in a unit circle STEM_PC11T-IIa-1
trigonometric problems involving 2. convert degree measure to radian measure and vice versa STEM_PC11T-IIa-2
D
identities, inverse
trigonometric
circular functions
3. illustrate angles in standard position and coterminal angles STEM_PC11T-IIa-3
functions, and 4. illustrate the different circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIb-1
the polar
coordinate 5. uses reference angles to find exact values of circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIb-2
system 6. determine the domain and range of the different circular functions STEM_PC11T-IIc-1
7. graph the six circular functions (a) amplitude, (b) period, and (c)
STEM_PC11T-IIc-d-1
phase shift
EP
8. solve problems involving circular functions STEM_PC11T-IId-2
2. apply appropriate 9. determine whether an equation is an identity or a conditional
trigonometric identities in STEM_PC11T-IIe-1
equation
E
solving situational
problems
10.
11.
derive the fundamental trigonometric identities
derive trigonometric identities involving sum and difference of
STEM_PC11T-IIe-2
STEM_PC11T-IIe-3
angles
4
12. derive the double and half-angle formulas STEM_PC11T-IIf-1
D 13. simplify trigonometric expressions STEM_PC11T-IIf-2
14. prove other trigonometric identities STEM_PC11T-IIf-g-1
15. solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities STEM_PC11T-IIg-2
3. formulate and solve 16. illustrate the domain and range of the inverse trigonometric
STEM_PC11T-IIh-1
accurately situational functions.
problems involving 17.
C
evaluate an inverse trigonometric expression. STEM_PC11T-IIh-2
appropriate trigonometric 18. solve trigonometric equations. STEM_PC11T-IIh-i-1
functions 19. solve situational problems involving inverse trigonometric
STEM_PC11T-IIi-2
functions and trigonometric equations
4. formulate and solve 20.
O
locate points in polar coordinate system STEM_PC11T-IIj-1
accurately situational 21. convert the coordinates of a point from rectangular to polar
STEM_PC11T-IIj-2
problems involving the systems and vice versa
polar coordinate system 22. solve situational problems involving polar coordinate system STEM_PC11T-IIj-3
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
K to 12 Senior High School STEM Specialized Subject – Pre-Calculus December 2013 Page 3 of 4
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
K to 12 BASIC EDUCATION CURRICULUM
SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL – SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATHEMATICS (STEM) SPECIALIZED SUBJECT
Sample: STEM_PC11AG-Ia-1
D
LEGEND SAMPLE DOMAIN/ COMPONENT CODE
5
Uppercase Domain/Content/ Trigonometry T
Letter/s Component/ Topic
D
Analytic Geometry
-
Roman Numeral
*Zero if no specific Quarter First Quarter I
quarter
C
Lowercase
Letter/s
*Put a hyphen (-) in
between letters to
Week Week one
O a
indicate more than a
specific week
-
illustrate the different types
of conic sections: parabola,
Arabic Number Competency 1
PY
ellipse, circle, hyperbola,
and degenerate cases
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
K to 12 Senior High School STEM Specialized Subject – Pre-Calculus December 2013 Page 4 of 4
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unit 1
Analytic Geometry
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Stretching from Samar to Leyte with a total length of more than two kilome-
ters, the San Juanico Bridge has been serving as one of the main thoroughfares
of economic and social development in the country since its completion in 1973.
Adding picturesque effect on the whole architecture, geometric structures are
subtly built to serve other purposes. The arch-shaped support on the main span
of the bridge helps maximize its strength to withstand mechanical resonance and
aeroelastic flutter brought about by heavy vehicles and passing winds.
6
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1.1. Introduction to Conic Sections and Circles
PY
(3) determine the standard form of equation of a circle;
(4) graph a circle in a rectangular coordinate system; and
(5) solve situational problems involving conic sections (circles).
Lesson Outline
O
(1) Introduction of the four conic sections, along with the degenerate conics
(2) Definition of a circle
C
(3) Derivation of the standard equation of a circle
(4) Graphing circles
D
(5) Solving situational problems involving circles
Introduction
E
first illustrate how each of these curves is obtained from the intersection of a
plane and a cone, and then discuss the first of their kind, circles. The other conic
sections will be covered in the next lessons.
D
We introduce the conic sections (or conics), a particular class of curves which
oftentimes appear in nature and which have applications in other fields. One
of the first shapes we learned, a circle, is a conic. When you throw a ball, the
trajectory it takes is a parabola. The orbit taken by each planet around the sun
is an ellipse. Properties of hyperbolas have been used in the design of certain
telescopes and navigation systems. We will discuss circles in this lesson, leaving
parabolas, ellipses, and hyperbolas for subsequent lessons.
• Circle (Figure 1.1) - when the plane is horizontal
7
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Ellipse (Figure 1.1) - when the (tilted) plane intersects only one cone to form
a bounded curve
• Parabola (Figure 1.2) - when the plane intersects only one cone to form an
unbounded curve
• Hyperbola (Figure 1.3) - when the plane (not necessarily vertical) intersects
both cones to form two unbounded curves (each called a branch of the hyper-
bola)
PY
Figure 1.1
referred to as degenerate conics: a point, one line, and two lines. See Figures 1.4,
1.5 and 1.6.
EP
D
8
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1.1.2. Definition and Equation of a Circle
A circle may also be considered a special kind of ellipse (for the special case when
the tilted plane is horizontal). As we get to know more about a circle, we will
also be able to distinguish more between these two conics.
See Figure 1.7, with the point C(3, 1) shown. From the figure, the distance
of A(−2, 1) from pC is AC = 5. By the distance formula, the distance of B(6, 5)
from C is BC = (6 − 3)2 + (5 − 1)2 = 5. There are other points P such that
P C = 5. The collection of all such points which are 5 units away from C, forms
a circle.
PY
O
C
Figure 1.7 Figure 1.8
E D
Let C be a given point. The set of all points P having the same
distance from C is called a circle. The point C is called the center of
EP
The term radius is both used to refer to a segment from the center C to a
point P on the circle, and the length of this segment.
D
See Figure 1.8, where a circle is drawn. It has center C(h, k) and radius r > 0.
A point P (x, y) is on the circle if and only if P C = r. For any such point then,
its coordinates should satisfy the following.
PC = r
p
(x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r
(x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r2
This is the standard equation of the circle with center C(h, k) and radius r. If
the center is the origin, then h = 0 and k = 0. The standard equation is then
x2 + y 2 = r 2 .
9
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.1.1. In each item, give the standard equation of the circle satisfying
the given conditions.
(1) center at the origin, radius 4
√
(2) center (−4, 3), radius 7
(3) circle in Figure 1.7
(4) circle A in Figure 1.9
(5) circle B in Figure 1.9
(6) center (5, −6), tangent to the y-axis
(7) center (5, −6), tangent to the x-axis
PY
(8) has a diameter with endpoints A(−1, 4) and B(4, 2)
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 1.9
D
Solution. (1) x2 + y 2 = 16
(2) (x + 4)2 + (y − 3)2 = 7
(3) The center is (3, 1) and the radius is 5, so the equation is (x − 3)2 + (y − 1)2 =
25.
(4) By inspection, the center is (−2, −1) and the radius is 4. The equation is
(x + 2)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16.
(5) Similarly by inspection, we have (x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 9.
(6) The center is 5 units away from the y-axis, so the radius is r = 5 (you can
make a sketch to see why). The equation is (x − 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 25.
10
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(7) Similarly, since the center is 6 units away from the x-axis, the equation is
(x − 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 36.
(8) The center C is the midpoint of A and B: C = −1+4 , 4+2
= 3
, 3 . The
q
2 q 2 2
2
radius is then r = AC = −1 − 32 + (4 − 3)2 = 29
4
. The circle has
2
equation x − 32 + (y − 3)2 = 29 4
. 2
Seatwork/Homework 1.1.2
Find the standard equation of the circle being described in each item.
√
(1) With center at the origin, radius 11 Answer: x2 + y 2 = 11
PY
(2) With center (−6, 7), tangent to the y-axis Answer: (x + 6)2 + (y − 7)2 = 36
(3) Has a diameter with endpoints A(−3, 2) and B(7, 4)
Answer: (x − 2)2 + (y − 3)2 = 26
O
1.1.3. More Properties of Circles
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0, A 6= 0,
or
x2 + y 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0,
D
we can determine the standard form by completing the square in both variables.
Completing the square in an expression like x2 + 14x means determining Teaching Notes
Recall the
the term to be added that will produce a perfect polynomial square. Since the technique of
coefficient of x2 is already 1, we take half the coefficient of x and square it, and completing the
square. This was
we get 49. Indeed, x2 + 14x + 49 = (x + 7)2 is a perfect square. To complete introduced in
the square in, say, 3x2 + 18x, we factor the coefficient of x2 from the expression: Grade 9.
3(x2 + 6x), then add 9 inside. When completing a square in an equation, any
extra term introduced on one side should also be added to the other side.
Example 1.1.2. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equa-
tion in each item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
11
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(1) x2 + y 2 − 6x = 7
(2) x2 + y 2 − 14x + 2y = −14
(3) 16x2 + 16y 2 + 96x − 40y = 315
Solution. The first step is to rewrite each equation in standard form by complet-
ing the square in x and in y. From the standard equation, we can determine the
center and radius.
(1)
x2 − 6x + y 2 = 7
x2 − 6x + 9 + y 2 = 7 + 9
PY
(x − 3)2 + y 2 = 16
Center (3, 0), r = 4, Figure 1.10
(2)
x2 − 14x + y 2 + 2y = −14
O
x2 − 14x + 49 + y 2 + 2y + 1 = −14 + 49 + 1
(x − 7)2 + (y + 1)2 = 36
Center (7, −1), r = 6, Figure 1.11
C
(3)
16x2 + 96x + 16y 2 − 40y = 315
D
2 2 5
16(x + 6x) + 16 y − y = 315
2
E
2 2 5 25 25
16(x + 6x + 9) + 16 y − y + = 315 + 16(9) + 16
2 16 16
EP
2
5
16(x + 3)2 + 16 y − = 484
4
2 2
2 5 484 121 11
Teaching Notes (x + 3) + y − = = =
4 16 4 2
D
A common mistake
committed by
Center −3, 54 , r = 5.5, Figure 1.12. 2
students is to add 9
and 25
16
only. They
often forget the
multiplier outside
the parenthesis.
12
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In the standard equation (x − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r2 , both the two squared
terms on the left side have coefficient 1. This is the reason why in the preceding
example, we divided by 16 at the last equation.
Seatwork/Homework 1.1.3
Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each item.
Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
(1) x2 + y 2 − 5x + 4y = 46
Answer: center 25 , −2 , radius 15
2
= 7.5, Figure 1.13
(2) 4x2 + 4y 2 + 40x − 32y = 5
PY
13
Answer: center (−5, 4), radius 2
= 6.5, Figure 1.14
O
C
D
Figure 1.13 Figure 1.14
E
13
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We draw a coordinate system with origin at the middle of the highway,
as shown. Because of the given radius, the tunnel’s boundary is on the circle
x2 + y 2 = 122 . Point P is the point on the arc just above the edge of a lane, so
its x-coordinate is 10. We√need its y-coordinate. We then solve 102 + y 2 = 122
for y > 0, giving us y = 2 11 ≈ 6.63 ft. 2
Example 1.1.4. A piece of a broken plate was dug up in an archaeological site.
It was put on top of a grid, as shown in Figure 1.15, with the arc of the plate
passing through A(−7, 0), B(1, 4) and C(7, 2). Find its center, and the standard
Teaching Notes equation of the circle describing the boundary of the plate.
PY
A perpendicular
bisector of a
segment is the line
that passes
through the
midpoint of the
segment and is
O
perpendicular to
the segment.
C
E D
Figure 1.15
EP
D
Figure 1.16
14
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
bisectors of AB and BC (see Figure 1.16). Recall that, in a circle, the perpen-
dicular bisector of any
chord passes through4−0 the center. Since the midpoint M
−7+1 0+4
of AB is 2
, 2 = (−3, 2), and mAB = 1+7 = 12 , the perpendicular bisector
of AB has equation y − 2 = −2(x + 3), or equivalently, y = −2x − 4.
Since the midpoint N of BC is 1+7 2
, 4+2
2
= (4, 3), and mBC = 2−4
7−1
= − 31 ,
the perpendicular bisector of BC has equation y − 3 = 3(x − 4), or equivalently,
y = 3x − 9.
The intersection of the two lines y = 2x − 4 and y = 3x − 9 is (1, −6) (by
solving a system of linear equations). We can take the radius as the distance of
this point from any of A, B or C (it’s most convenient to use B in this case). We
then get r = 10. The standard equation is thus (x − 1)2 + (y + 6)2 = 100. 2
PY
Seatwork/Homework 1.1.4
? 1. A single-lane street 10 ft wide goes through a semicircular tunnel with radius
9 ft. How high is the tunnel at the edge of each lane? Round off to 2 decimal
O
places. Answer: 7.48 ft
2. An archeologist found the remains of an ancient wheel, which she then placed
C
on a grid. If an arc of the wheel passes through A(−7, 0), B(−3, 4) and C(7, 0),
locate the center of the wheel, and the standard equation of the circle defining
its boundary. Answer: (0, −3), x2 + (y + 3)2 = 58
D
Exercises 1.1
E
1. Identify the center and radius of the circle with the given equation in each
item. Sketch its graph, and indicate the center.
EP
15
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(a) (b)
O
C
E D
(c) (d)
EP
D
(e) (f)
16
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(g) (h)
O
C
E D
(i) (j)
EP
2. Find the standard equation of the circle which satisfies the given conditions. Teaching Notes
To determine the
√ equation of a
(a) center at the origin, radius 2 2 Answer: x2 + y 2 = 8 circle, we just need
to determine the
(b) center at (15, −20), radius 9 Answer: (x − 15)2 + (y + 20)2 = 81
D
Solution. The radius is the distance from the center to (9, 4):
p √
(5 − 9)2 + (6 − 4)2 = 20.
17
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(f) center at (−2, 3), tangent to the line y = 8
Answer: (x + 2)2 + (y − 3)2 = 25
PY
(i) a diameter with endpoints (−9, 2) and (15, 12)
Answer: (x − 3)2 + (y − 7)2 = 169
(j) concentric with x2 + y 2 + 2x − 4y = 5, radius is 7
O
Answer: (x + 1)2 + (y − 2)2 = 49
Solution. Two circles are said to be concentric if they have the same
C
center. The standard equation of the given circle is
(x + 1) + (y − 2)2 = 10. Thus, the circle we’re looking for has center
2
(x − 4)2 + (y − 5)2 = 52 .
EP
Its radius is 5, so its area is 25π sq. units. The circle we are looking
for should have area 100π sq. units, so its radius is 10.
18
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(n) center at (−4, 3), tangent to the line y = −4x − 30
Answer: (x + 4)2 + (y − 3)2 = 17
PY
was determined to be 6 km away from the station.
(a) Find the equation of the curve that contains the possible location of
the epicenter. Answer: x2 + (y + 3)2 = 62
(b) If furthermore, the epicenter was determined to be 2 km away from
O
the shore, find its possible coordinates (rounded off to two decimal
places). C Answer: (±3.32, 2)
Solution. Since the epicenter is 6 units away from (0, −3), it could be any
of the points of a circle with center (0, −3) and radius 6. The equation is
then x2 + (y + 3)2 = 62 . Next, we solve this√equation for x if y = 2, and we
D
get x2 = 62 − (2 + 3)2 = 11, and so x = ± 11 ≈ ±3.32.
E
4. A ferris wheel is elevated 1 m above ground. When a car reaches the highest
point on the ferris wheel, its altitude from ground level is 31 m. How far
EP
19
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 5. A window is to be constructed as shown, with its upper boundary the arc
of a circle having radius 4 ft and center at the midpoint of base AD. If the
vertical side is to be 34 as long as the base, find the dimensions (vertical side
and base) of this window. Round off your final answer to 1 decimal place.
Answer: base 4.44 ft, side 3.33 ft
PY
O
C
Solution. We put two lines corresponding to the x-axis and y-axis, as shown,
with the origin coinciding with the midpoint of the window’s base. This
origin is the center of the circle containing the arc. The equation of the circle
D
is then x2 + y 2 = 16. Let n be length of the base AD, so thenside
2 AD has
3 n 3n 3n 2
length 4 n. Point B then has coordinates 2 , 4 . Therefore, 2 + 4 =
16. Solving this for n > 0 yields n = √1613 . The base is then n ≈ 4.44 ft and
E
20
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a parabola
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of a parabola
(3) Graphing parabolas
(4) Solving situational problems involving parabolas
Introduction
A parabola is one of the conic sections. We have already seen parabolas which
open upward or downward, as graphs of quadratic functions. Here, we will see
parabolas opening to the left or right. Applications of parabolas are presented
PY
at the end.
O
Consider the point F (0, 2) and the line ` having equation y = −2, as shown in
Figure 1.17. What are the distances of A(4, 2) from F and from `? (The latter
is taken as the distance of A from A` , the point on ` closest to A). How about
C
the distances of B(−8, 8) from F and from ` (from B` )?
AF = 4 and AA` = 4
p
D
BF = (−8 − 0)2 + (8 − 2)2 = 10 and BB` = 10
There are other points P such that P F = P P` (where P` is the closest point on
E
line `). The collection of all such points forms a shape called a parabola.
EP
D
Let F be a given point, and ` a given line not containing F . The set of
all points P such that its distances from F and from ` are the same, is
called a parabola. The point F is its focus and the line ` its directrix.
21
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Consider a parabola with focus F (0, c) and directrix ` having equation y = −c.
See Figure 1.18. The focus and directrix are c units above and below, respectively,
the origin. Let P (x, y) be a point on the parabola so P F = P P` , where P` is the
point on ` closest to P . The point P has to be on the same side of the directrix
as the focus (if P was below, it would be closer to ` than it is from F ).
P F = P P`
p
x2 + (y − c)2 = y − (−c) = y + c
x2 + y 2 − 2cy + c2 = y 2 + 2cy + c2
x2 = 4cy
PY
The vertex V is the point midway between the focus and the directrix. This
equation, x2 = 4cy, is then the standard equation of a parabola opening upward
with vertex V (0, 0).
Suppose the focus is F (0, −c) and the directrix is y = c. In this case, a
O
point P on the resulting parabola would be below the directrix (just like the
focus).
p Instead of opening upward, it will open downward. Consequently, P F =
x2 + (y + c)2 and P P` = c − y (you may draw a version of Figure 1.18 for
C
this case). Computations similar to the one done above will lead to the equation
x2 = −4cy.
We collect here the features of the graph of a parabola with standard equation
D
x2 = 4cy or x2 = −4cy, where c > 0.
E
EP
D
• If the parabola opens upward, the vertex is the lowest point. If the
parabola opens downward, the vertex is the highest point.
22
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Any point on the parabola has the same distance from the focus as it
has from the directrix.
• This line divides the parabola into two parts which are mirror images
of each other.
Example 1.2.1. Determine the focus and directrix of the parabola with the
given equation. Sketch the graph, and indicate the focus, directrix, vertex, and
axis of symmetry.
(1) x2 = 12y (2) x2 = −6y
PY
Solution. (1) The vertex is V (0, 0) and the parabola opens upward. From 4c =
12, c = 3. The focus, c = 3 units above the vertex, is F (0, 3). The directrix,
3 units below the vertex, is y = −3. The axis of symmetry is x = 0.
O
C
E D
EP
23
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.2.2. What is the standard equation of the parabola in Figure 1.17?
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.1
1. Give the focus and directrix of the parabola with equation x2 = 10y. Sketch
the graph, and indicate
the focus, directrix, vertex, and axis of symmetry.
Answer: focus 0, 25 , directrix y = − 25
PY
O
C
E D
2. Find the standard equation of the parabola with focus F (0, −3.5) and directrix
y = 3.5. Answer: x2 = −14y
EP
The parabolas we considered so far are “vertical” and have their vertices at the
D
origin. Some parabolas open instead horizontally (to the left or right), and some
have vertices not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given
in the box. The corresponding computations are more involved, but are similar
to the one above, and so are not shown anymore.
In all four cases below, we assume that c > 0. The vertex is V (h, k), and it
lies between the focus F and the directrix `. The focus F is c units away from
the vertex V , and the directrix is c units away from the vertex. Recall that, for
any point on the parabola, its distance from the focus is the same as its distance
from the directrix.
24
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(x − h)2 = 4c(y − k) (y − k)2 = 4c(x − h)
O
C
D
25
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.2.3. The figure shows the graph of parabola, with only its focus and
Teaching Notes vertex indicated. Find its standard equation. What is its directrix and its axis
In finding the
equation of a
of symmetry?
parabola, we just
need to determine
the vertex and the
value of c.
PY
O
C
D
Solution. The vertex is V (5, −4) and the focus is F (3, −4). From these, we
deduce the following: h = 5, k = −4, c = 2 (the distance of the focus from the
vertex). Since the parabola opens to the left, we use the template (y − k)2 =
E
The standard equation (y + 4)2 = −8(x − 5) from the preceding example can
be rewritten as y 2 + 8x + 8y − 24 = 0, an equation of the parabola in general
form.
If the equation is given in the general form Ax2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (A and C
are nonzero) or By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0 (B and C are nonzero), we can determine
the standard form by completing the square in both variables.
Example 1.2.4. Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry
of the parabola with the given equation. Sketch the parabola, and include these
points and lines.
(a) y 2 − 5x + 12y = −16 (b) 5x2 + 30x + 24y = 51
26
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. (1) We complete the square on y, and move x to the other side.
y 2 + 12y = 5x − 16
y 2 + 12y + 36 = 5x − 16 + 36 = 5x + 20
(y + 6)2 = 5(x + 4)
The parabola opens to the right. It has vertex V (−4, −6). From 4c = 5, we
get c = 45 = 1.25. The focus is c = 1.25 units to the right of V : F (−2.75, −6).
The (vertical) directrix is c = 1.25 units to the left of V : x = −5.25. The
(horizontal) axis is through V : y = −6.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
27
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Example 1.2.5. A parabola has focus F (7, 9) and directrix y = 3. Find its
standard equation.
Solution. The directrix is horizontal, and the focus is above it. The parabola
O
then opens upward and its standard equation has the form (x − h)2 = 4c(y − k).
Since the distance from the focus to the directrix is 2c = 9 − 3 = 6, then c = 3.
Thus, the vertex is V (7, 6), the point 3 units below F . The standard equation is
then (x − 7)2 = 12(y − 6).
C 2
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.2
D
1. Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry of the parabola
with equation x2 − 6x + 5y = −34. Sketch the graph, and include these points
E
and lines.
Answer: vertex (3, −5), focus (3, −6.25), directrix y = −3.75, axis x = 3
EP
D
28
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. A parabola has focus F (−2, −5) and directrix x = 6. Find the standard
equation of the parabola. Answer: (y + 5)2 = −16(x − 2)
Example 1.2.6. A satellite dish has a shape called a paraboloid, where each
cross-section is a parabola. Since radio signals (parallel to the axis) will bounce
off the surface of the dish to the focus, the receiver should be placed at the focus.
PY
How far should the receiver be from the vertex, if the dish is 12 ft across, and 4.5
ft deep at the vertex?
O
C
E D
Solution. The second figure above shows a cross-section of the satellite dish drawn
EP
on a rectangular coordinate system, with the vertex at the origin. From the
problem, we deduce that (6, 4.5) is a point on the parabola. We need the distance
of the focus from the vertex, i.e., the value of c in x2 = 4cy.
x2 = 4cy
D
62 = 4c(4.5)
62
c= =2
4 · 4.5
Thus, the receiver should be 2 ft away from the vertex. 2
29
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Solution. Refer to the figure above, where the parabolic cable is drawn with
its vertex on the y-axis 30 ft above the origin. We may write its equation as
(x − 0)2 = a(y − 30); since we don’t need the focal distance, we use the simpler
variable a in place of 4c. Since the towers are 150 ft high and 400 ft apart, we
O
deduce from the figure that (200, 150) is a point on the parabola.
x2 = a(y − 30)
C
2002 = a(150 − 30)
2002 1000
a= =
120 3
D
The parabola has equation x2 = 1000 3
(y − 30), or equivalently,
2
y = 0.003x + 30. For the two points on the parabola 50 ft away from the
E
y = 0.003(1502 ) + 30 = 97.5.
Thus, the cable is 97.5 ft high 50 ft away from either tower. (As expected, we
get the same answer from x = −150.) 2
D
Seatwork/Homework 1.2.3
? 1. A satellite dish in the shape of a paraboloid is 10 ft across, and 4 ft deep at
its vertex. How far is the receiver from the vertex, if it is placed at the focus?
Round off your answer to 2 decimal places. (Refer to Example 1.2.6.)
Answer: 1.56 ft
Exercises 1.2
1. Determine the vertex, focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry of the parabola
with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines.
30
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) x2 = −4y (d) x2 + 6x + 8y = 7
(b) 3y 2 = 24x (e) y 2 − 12x + 8y = −40
2
(c) y + 52 = −5 x − 92 (f) 16x2 + 72x − 112y = −221
Answer:
PY
(c) (4.5, −2.5) (3.25, −2.5) x = 5.75 y = −2.5
(d) (−3, 2) (−3, 0) y=4 x = −3
(e) (2, −4) (5, −4) x = −1 y = −4
(f) (−2.25, 1.25) (−2.25, 3) y = −0.5 x = −2.25
O
C
E D
EP
31
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) vertex (−8, 3), directrix x = −10.5 Answer: (y − 3)2 = 10(x + 8)
(c) vertex (−4, 2), focus (−4, −1) Answer: (x + 4)2 = −12(y − 2)
(d) focus (7, 11), directrix x = 1 Answer: (y − 11)2 = 12(x − 4)
(e) focus (7, 11), directrix y = 4 Answer: (x − 7)2 = 14(y − 7.5)
(f) vertex (−5, −7), vertical axis of symmetry, through the point P (7, 11)
Answer: (x + 5)2 = 8(y + 7)
Solution. Since the axis is vertical and P is above the vertex, then the
parabola opens upward and has equation of the form (x + 5)2 = 4c(y + 7).
We plug the coordinates of P : (7 + 5)2 = 4c(11 + 7). We then get c = 2.
Thus, we have (x + 5)2 = 8(y + 7).
PY
(g) vertex (−5, −7), horizontal axis of symmetry, through the point P (7, 11)
Answer: (y + 7)2 = 27(x + 5)
Solution. Since the axis is horizontal and P is to the right of the vertex,
O
then the parabola opens to the right and has equation of the form (y +
7)2 = 4c(x + 5). We plug the coordinates of P : (11 + 7)2 = 4c(7 + 5).
C
We then get c = 6.75. Thus, we have (y + 7)2 = 27(x + 5).
3. A satellite dish shaped like a paraboloid, has diameter 2.4 ft and depth 0.9 ft.
If the receiver is placed at the focus, how far should the receiver be from the
D
vertex? Answer: 0.4 ft
4. If the diameter of the satellite dish from the previous problem is doubled, with
E
the depth kept the same, how far should the receiver be from the vertex?
Answer: 1.6 ft
EP
? 5. A satellite dish is shaped like a paraboloid, with the receiver placed at the
focus. It is to have a depth of 0.44 m at the vertex, with the receiver placed
0.11 m away from the vertex. What should the diameter of the satellite dish
be? Answer: 0.88 m
? 6. A flashlight is shaped like a paraboloid, so that if its light bulb is placed at
D
the focus, the light rays from the bulb will then bounce off the surface in a
focused direction that is parallel to the axis. If the paraboloid has a depth of
1.8 in and the diameter on its surface is 6 in, how far should the light source
be placed from the vertex? Answer: 1.25 in
7. The towers supporting the cable of a suspension bridge are 1200 m apart and
170 m above the bridge it supports. Suppose the cable hangs, following the
shape of a parabola, with its lowest point 20 m above the bridge. How high is
the cable 120 m away from a tower? Answer: 116 m
32
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1.3. Ellipses
PY
(4) solve situational problems involving conic sections (ellipses).
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of an ellipse
O
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of an ellipse
(3) Graphing ellipses
C
(4) Solving situational problems involving ellipses
Introduction
D
Unlike circle and parabola, an ellipse is one of the conic sections that most stu-
dents have not encountered formally before. Its shape is a bounded curve which
E
looks like a flattened circle. The orbits of the planets in our solar system around
the sun happen to be elliptical in shape. Also, just like parabolas, ellipses have
reflective properties that have been used in the construction of certain structures.
EP
Consider the points F1 (−3, 0) and F2 (3, 0), as shown in Figure 1.19. What is the
sum of the distances of A(4, 2.4) from F1 and from F2 ? How about the sum of
the distances of B (and C(0, −4)) from F1 and from F2 ? Teaching Notes
You may review
the distance
AF1 + AF2 = 7.4 + 2.6 = 10 formula.
BF1 + BF2 = 3.8 + 6.2 = 10
CF1 + CF2 = 5 + 5 = 10
There are other points P such that P F1 + P F2 = 10. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called an ellipse.
33
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 1.19
Figure 1.20
PY
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 add up to a certain constant, is called
O
an ellipse. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the ellipse.
C
Given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (−c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the foci, both c
units away from their center (0, 0). See Figure 1.20. Let P (x, y) be a point on
the ellipse. Let the common sum of the distances be 2a (the coefficient 2 will
D
make computations simpler). Thus, we have P F1 + P F2 = 2a.
P F1 = 2a − P F2
E
p p
(x + c)2 + y 2 = 2a − (x − c)2 + y 2
p
x2 + 2cx + c2 + y 2 = 4a2 − 4a (x − c)2 + y 2 + x2 − 2cx + c2 + y 2
EP
p
a (x − c)2 + y 2 = a2 − cx
a2 x2 − 2cx + c2 + y 2 = a4 − 2a2 cx + c2 x2
(a2 − c2 )x2 + a2 y 2 = a4 − a2 c2 = a2 (a2 − c2 )
√
D
b2 x 2 + a2 y 2 = a2 b2 by letting b = a2 − c2 , so a > b
x2 y 2
+ 2 =1
a2 b
√
When we let b = a2 − c2 , we assumed a > c. To see why this is true, look at
4P F1 F2 in Figure 1.20. By the Triangle Inequality, P F1 + P F2 > F1 F2 , which
implies 2a > 2c, so a > c.
We collect here the features of the graph of an ellipse with standard equation
x2 y 2 √
2
+ 2 = 1, where a > b. Let c = a2 − b2 .
a b
34
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(1) center : origin (0, 0)
(2) foci : F1 (−c, 0) and F2 (c, 0)
O
(3) vertices: V1 (−a, 0) and V2 (a, 0) C
• The vertices are points on the ellipse, collinear with the center and foci.
• If y = 0, then x = ±a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.
• The segment V1 V2 is called the major axis. Its length is 2a. It divides
D
the ellipse into two congruent parts.
• The segment through the center, perpendicular to the major axis, is the
minor axis. It meets the ellipse at the covertices. It divides the ellipse
EP
Example 1.3.1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices, and covertices of the
ellipse with equation
x2 y 2
+ = 1.
25 9
Sketch the graph, and include these points.
√
Solution. With a2 = 25 and b2 = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c = a2 − b2 = 4.
35
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Example 1.3.2. Find the (standard) equation of the ellipse whose foci are
F1 (−3, 0) and F2 (3, 0), such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances
from the foci is 10. See Figure 1.19.
√
Solution. We have 2a = 10 and c = 3, so a = 5 and b = a2 − c2 = 4. The
O
equation is
x2 y 2
+ = 1. 2
25 16
C
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.1
D
1. Give the coordinates of the foci, vertices, and covertices of the ellipse with
x2 y2
equation + = 1. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
169 25
E
Answer: foci: F1 (−12, 0) and F2 (12, 0), vertices: V1 (−13, 0) and V2 (13, 0),
covertices: W1 (0, −5) and W2 (0, 5)
EP
D
2. Find the equation in standard form of the ellipse whose foci are F1 (−8, 0) and
F2 (8, 0), such that for any point on it, the sum of its distances from the foci
x2 y2
is 20. Answer: + =1
100 36
36
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1.3.2. More Properties of Ellipses
Some ellipses have their foci aligned vertically, and some have centers not at
the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given in the box. The
derivations are more involved, but are similar to the one above, and so are not
shown anymore.
PY
(0, 0)
O
C
x2 y 2 x2 y 2
+ 2 = 1, a > b + 2 = 1, b > a
D
a2 b b2 a
E
EP
(h, k)
D
37
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√
In all four cases above, a > b and c = a2 − b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c
units away from the center. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the
center, the major axis has length 2a, the covertices W1 and W2 are b units away
from the center, and the minor axis has length 2b. Recall that, for any point on
the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 2a.
In the standard equation, if the x-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse
is horizontal. If the y-part has the bigger denominator, the ellipse is vertical.
Example 1.3.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices
of the ellipse with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
(x + 3)2 (y − 5)2
(1) + =1
24 49
PY
(2) 9x2 + 16y 2 − 126x + 64y = 71
√
Solution. √(1) From a2 = 49 and b2 = 24, we have a = 7, b = 2 6 ≈ 4.9, and
c = a2 − b2 = 5. The ellipse is vertical.
O
center: (−3, 5)
foci: F1 (−3, 0), F2 (−3, 10)
C
vertices: V1 (−3, −2), V2 (−3, 12)
√
covertices: W1 (−3 − 2 6, 5) ≈ (−7.9, 5)
D
√
W2 (−3 + 2 6, 5) ≈ (1.9, 5)
E
EP
D
38
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(2) We first change the given equation to standard form.
PY
center: (7, −2)
√
foci: F1 (7 − 2 7, −2) ≈ (1.7, −2)
√
F2 (7 + 2 7, −2) ≈ (12.3, −2)
O
vertices: V1 (−1, −2), V2 (15, −2)
C
covertices: W1 (7, −8), W2 (7, 4)
E D
EP
D
Example 1.3.4. The foci of an ellipse are (−3, −6) and (−3, 2). For any point
on the ellipse, the sum of its distances from the foci is 14. Find the standard
equation of the ellipse.
39
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. The midpoint (−3, −2) of the foci is the center of the ellipse. The
ellipse is vertical (because the foci are vertically
√ aligned)√and c = 4. From the
given sum, 2a = 14 so a = 7. Also, b = a2 − c2 = 33. The equation is
(x + 3)2 (y + 2)2
+ = 1. 2
33 49
√ √
Example 1.3.5. An ellipse has vertices (2 − 61, −5) and (2 + 61, −5), and
its minor axis is 12 units long. Find its standard equation and its foci.
Solution. The midpoint (2, −5)√of the vertices is the center of the ellipse, which is
horizontal. Each vertex is a = 61 units away from the center. From the length of
(x − 2)2 (y + 5)2
the minor axis, 2b = 12 so b = 6. The standard equation is + =
PY
√ 61 36
1. Each focus is c = a2 − b2 = 5 units away from (2, −5), so their coordinates
are (−3, −5) and (7, −5). 2
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.2
O
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and covertices of the ellipse
with equation 41x2 + 16y 2 + 246x − 192y + 289 = 0. Sketch the graph, and
include these points.
C
Answer: center C(−3,
√ √6), foci F1 (−3, 1) and F2 (−3, 11), vertices V1 (−3, 6 −
41) and V2 (−3, 6 + 41), covertices W1 (−7, 6) and W2 (1, 6)
E D
EP
D
40
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. An ellipse has vertices (−10, −4) and (6, −4), and covertices (−2, −9) and
(−2, 1). Find its standard equation and its foci.
(x + 2)2 (y + 4)2 √ √
Answer: + = 1, foci (−2 − 39, −4) and (−2 + 39, −4)
64 25
PY
the center, and 36 ft across at the base. At most how high should a passing truck
be, if it is 12 ft wide, for it to be able to fit through the tunnel? Round off your
answer to two decimal places.
O
C
E D
EP
To maximize its height, the corners of the truck, as shown in the figure, would
have to just touch the ellipse. Since the truck is 12 ft wide, let the point (6, n)
be the corner of the truck in the first quadrant, where n > 0, is the (maximum)
height of the truck. Since this point is on the ellipse, it should fit the equation.
Thus, we have
62 n2
+ =1
182 152
2 2 62
n = 15 1 − 2
18
√
n = 10 2 ≈ 14.14 ft 2
41
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 1.3.7. The orbit of a planet has the shape of an ellipse, and on one
of the foci is the star around which it revolves. The planet is closest to the star
when it is at one vertex. It is farthest from the star when it is at the other vertex.
Suppose the closest and farthest distances of the planet from this star, are 420
million kilometers and 580 million kilometers, respectively. Find the equation of
the ellipse, in standard form, with center at the origin and the star at the x-axis.
Assume all units are in millions of kilometers.
PY
O
C
D
Solution. In the figure above, the orbit is drawn as a horizontal ellipse with
E
center at the origin. From the planet’s distances from the star, at its closest
and farthest points, it follows that the major axis is 2a = 420 + 580 = 1000
EP
x2 y2
+ = 1.
D
250000 243600
The star could have been placed on the negative x-axis, and the answer would
still be the same. 2
Seatwork/Homework 1.3.3
? 1. The arch of a bridge is in the shape of a semiellipse, with its major axis at the
water level. Suppose the arch is 20 ft high in the middle, and 120 ft across its
major axis. How high above the water level is the arch, at a point 20 ft from
the center (horizontally)? Round off to 2 decimal places. Refer to Example
1.3.6. Answer: 18.86 ft
42
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Exercises 1.3
1. Give the coordinates of the center, vertices, covertices, and foci of the ellipse
with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points.
x2 y2
(a) + =1
169 25
x2 y2
(b) + =1
144 169
(c) 4x2 + 13y 2 = 52
(x + 7)2 (y − 4)2
(d) + =1
16 25
PY
(e) 9x2 + 16y 2 + 72x − 96y + 144 = 0
(f) 36x2 + 20y 2 − 144x + 120y − 396 = 0
Answer:
Item Center Vertices Covertices Foci
O
(a) (0, 0) (±13, 0) C (0, ±5) (±12, 0)
(b) (0, 0) (0, ±13) (±12, 0) (0, ±5)
√
(c) (0, 0) (± 13, 0) (0, ±2) (±3, 0)
(d) (−7, 4) (−7, −1) (−11, 4) (−7, 1)
D
(−7, 9) (−3, 4) (−7, 7)
√
E
√
(f) (2, −3) (2, −9) (2 ± 2 5, −3) (2, −7)
(2, −3) (2, 3) (2, 1)
D
43
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d) (e) (f)
2. Find the standard equation of the ellipse which satisfies the given conditions.
PY
(a) foci (−7, 6) and (−1, 6), the sum of the distances of any point from the
(x + 4)2 (y − 6)2
foci is 14 Answer: + =1
49 40
(b) center (5, 3), horizontal major axis of length 20, minor axis of length 16
(x − 5)2 (y − 3)2
O
Answer: + =1
100 64
(c) major axis of length 22, foci 9 units above and below the center (2, 4)
C Answer:
(x − 2)2 (y − 4)2
+ =1
40 121
(d) covertices (−4, 8) and (10, 8), a focus at (3, 12)
D
(x − 3)2 (y − 8)2
Answer: + =1
49 65
E
Solution. The midpoint of the covertices is the center, (3, 8). From this
point, the given focus is c = 4 units away. Since b = 7 (the distance from
the center to a covertex), then a2 = b2 + c2 = 65. The ellipse then has
EP
(x − 3)2 (y − 8)2
equation + = 1.
49 65
(e) focus (−6, −2), covertex (−1, 5), horizontal major axis
(x + 1)2 (y + 2)2
D
Answer: + =1
74 49
Solution. Make a rough sketch of the points to see that the center is to
the right of the given focus, and below the given covertex. The center is
thus (−1, −2). It follows that c = 5, b = 7, so a2 = b2 + c2 = 74. The
(x + 1)2 (y + 2)2
ellipse then has equation + = 1.
74 49
3. A semielliptical tunnel has height 9 ft and a width of 30 ft. A truck that is
about to pass through is 12 ft wide and 8.3 ft high. Will this truck be able to
pass through the tunnel? Answer: No
44
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. A truck that is about to pass through the tunnel from the previous item is 10
ft wide and 8.3 ft high. Will this truck be able to pass through the tunnel?
Answer: Yes
5. An orbit of a satellite around a planet is an ellipse, with the planet at one
focus of this ellipse. The distance of the satellite from this star varies from
300, 000 km to 500, 000 km, attained when the satellite is at each of the two
vertices. Find the equation of this ellipse, if its center is at the origin, and the
vertices are on the x-axis. Assume all units are in 100, 000 km.
x2 y2
Answer: 16
+ 15
=1
x2
6. The orbit of a planet around a star is described by the equation 640,000
+
PY
y2
630,000
= 1, where the star is at one focus, and all units are in millions of
kilometers. The planet is closest and farthest from the star, when it is at the
vertices. How far is the planet when it is closest to the sun? How far is the
planet when it is farthest from the sun?
O
Answer: 700 million km, 900 million km
Solution. The ellipse has center at the origin, and major axis on the x-axis.
Since a2 = 640, 000, then a = 800, so √
2
Cthe vertices√are V1 (−800, 0) and
V2 (800, 00). Since b = 630, 000, then c = a2 − b2 = 10, 000 = 100. Sup-
pose the star is at the focus at the right of the origin (this choice is arbitrary,
since we could have chosen instead the focus on the left). Its location is then
D
F (100, 0). The closest distance is then V2 F = 700 (million kilometers) and
the farthest distance is V1 F = 900 (million kilometers).
E
in shape. If a person stands at one focus and speaks, the sound that is made
bounces off the ceiling and gets reflected to the other focus. Thus, if two
people stand at the foci (ignoring their heights), they will be able to hear each
other. If the room is 34 m long and 8 m high, how far from the center should
each of two people stand if they would like to whisper back and forth and hear
D
45
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We could put a coordinate system with the floor of the room on
the x-axis, and the center of the room at the origin, as shown in the figures.
The major axis has length 34, and the height of the room is half of the minor
x2 y2
axis. The ellipse that contains the ceiling then has equation 172 + 82 = 1. The
√ √
distance of a focus from the center is c = a2 − b2 = 172 − 82 = 15. Thus,
the two people should stand 15 m away from the center.
Solution. As in the previous problem, put a coordinate system with the floor
PY
of the room on the x-axis, and the center of the room at the origin. The major
axis has length 30, and half the minor axis is 9. The ellipse that contains the
x2 y2
ceiling then has equation 15 2 + 92 = 1. The distance of a focus from the center
√ √
is c = a2 − b2 = 152 − 92 = 12. If we put x = 12 in the equation of the
122 y2 27
ellipse, we get 152 + 92 = 1. Solving for y > 0 yields y = 5 = 5.4. The height
O
of the ceiling above each focus is 5.4 m.
4
C
D
Lesson 1.4. Hyperbolas
E
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a hyperbola
(2) Derivation of the standard equation of a hyperbola
(3) Graphing hyperbolas
(4) Solving situational problems involving hyperbolas
46
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Introduction
Just like ellipse, a hyperbola is one of the conic sections that most students
have not encountered formally before. Its graph consists of two unbounded
branches which extend in opposite directions. It is a misconception that each
branch is a parabola. This is not true, as parabolas and hyperbolas have very
different features. An application of hyperbolas in basic location and navigation
schemes are presented in an example and some exercises.
Consider the points F1 (−5, 0) and F2 (5, 0) as shown in Figure 1.21. What is the
PY
absolute value of the difference of the distances of A(3.75, −3) from F1 and from
F2 ? How about the absolute value of the difference of the distances of B −5, 16
3
from F1 and from F2 ?
O
16 34
|BF1 − BF2 | = − = 6
C 3 3
There are other points P such that |P F1 − P F2 | = 6. The collection of all such
points forms a shape called a hyperbola, which consists of two disjoint branches.
For points P on the left branch, P F2 − P F1 = 6; for those on the right branch,
D
P F1 − P F2 = 6.
E
EP
D
Let F1 and F2 be two distinct points. The set of all points P , whose
distances from F1 and from F2 differ by a certain constant, is called a
hyperbola. The points F1 and F2 are called the foci of the hyperbola.
In Figure 1.22, given are two points on the x-axis, F1 (−c, 0) and F2 (c, 0), the
foci, both c units away from their midpoint (0, 0). This midpoint is the center
47
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 1.23 Figure 1.24
PY
of the hyperbola. Let P (x, y) be a point on the hyperbola, and let the absolute
value of the difference of the distances of P from F1 and F2 , be 2a (the coefficient
2 will make computations simpler). Thus, |P F1 − P F2 | = 2a, and so
p p
O
2 2 2 2
(x + c) + y − (x − c) + y = 2a.
x2 y 2
C √
− 2 = 1, where b = c2 − a2 .
a2 b
D
√
When we let b = c2 − a2 , we assumed c > a. To see why this is true, suppose
that P is closer to F2 , so P F1 − P F2 = 2a. Refer to Figure 1.22. Suppose also
E
obtained because
of symmetry. p 2 p 2
2
(x + c) + y 2 = 2a + (x − c) + y2 2
p
cx − a2 = a (x − c)2 + y 2
p 2
(cx − a2 )2 = a (x − c)2 + y 2
(c2 − a2 )x2 − a2 y 2 = a2 (c2 − a2 )
√
b 2 x 2 − a2 y 2 = a2 b2 by letting b = c2 − a2 > 0
x2 y 2
− 2 =1
a2 b
48
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
We collect here the features of the graph of a hyperbola with standard equa-
tion
x2 y 2
− 2 = 1.
a2 b
√
2
Let c = a + b . 2
PY
(3) vertices: V1 (−a, 0) and V2 (a, 0)
• The vertices are points on the hyperbola, collinear with the center and
foci.
O
• If y = 0, then x = ±a. Each vertex is a units away from the center.
• The segment V1 V2 is called the transverse axis. Its length is 2a.
C
(4) asymptotes: y = ab x and y = − ab x, the lines `1 and `2 in Figure 1.24
• The asymptotes of the hyperbola are two lines passing through the cen-
D
ter which serve as a guide in graphing the hyperbola: each branch of
the hyperbola gets closer and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction
towards which the branch extends. (We need the concept of limits from
E
2 2
equation, replace 1 by 0, and in the resulting equation xa2 − yb2 = 0, solve
for y.
• To help us sketch the asymptotes, we point out that the asymptotes
`1 and `2 are the extended diagonals of the auxiliary rectangle drawn
D
in Figure 1.24. This rectangle has sides 2a and 2b with its diagonals
intersecting at the center C. Two sides are congruent and parallel to
the transverse axis V1 V2 . The other two sides are congruent and parallel
to the conjugate axis, the segment shown which is perpendicular to the
transverse axis at the center, and has length 2b.
Example 1.4.1. Determine the foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola
with equation
x2 y 2
− = 1.
9 7
Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate
axes, and the auxiliary rectangle.
49
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2 2
Solution. With
√ a = 9 and √ b = 7, we have
a = 3, b = 7, and c = a2 + b2 = 4.
foci: F1 (−4, 0) and F2 (4, 0)
vertices: V1 (−3, 0) and V2 (3, 0)
√ √
asymptotes: y = 37 x and y = − 37 x
The graph is shown at the right. The conju-
√
gate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 7 ≈
2.7 units above and below the center. 2
Example 1.4.2. Find the (standard) equation of the hyperbola whose foci are
F1 (−5, 0) and F2 (5, 0), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the
PY
difference of its distances from the foci is 6. See Figure 1.21.
√
Solution. We have 2a = 6 and c = 5, so a = 3 and b = c2 − a2 = 4. The
x2 y 2
hyperbola then has equation − = 1. 2
9 16
O
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.1 C
1. Determine foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hyperbola with equation
x2 y2
− = 1.
16 20
D
Sketch the graph, and include these points and lines, along with the auxiliary
rectangle.
E
Answer: foci
√
F1 (−6, 0) and
√
F2 (6, 0), vertices V1 (−4, 0) and V2 (4, 0), asymp-
5 5
totes y = 2 x and y = − 2 x
EP
D
√
2. Find the equation
√ in standard form of the hyperbola whose foci are F 1 (−4 2, 0)
and F2 (4 2, 0), such that for any point on it, the absolute value of the
x2 y2
difference of its distances from the foci is 8. Answer: − =1
16 16
50
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1.4.2. More Properties of Hyperbolas
The hyperbolas we considered so far are “horizontal” and have the origin as their
centers. Some hyperbolas have their foci aligned vertically, and some have centers
not at the origin. Their standard equations and properties are given in the box.
The derivations are more involved, but are similar to the one above, and so are
not shown anymore.
PY
O
(0, 0)
C
x2 y 2 y 2 x2
D
− 2 =1 − 2 =1
a2 b a2 b
E
EP
(h, k)
D
51
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√
In all four cases above, we let c = a2 + b2 . The foci F1 and F2 are c units
away from the center C. The vertices V1 and V2 are a units away from the center.
The transverse axis V1 V2 has length 2a. The conjugate axis has length 2b and is
perpendicular to the transverse axis. The transverse and conjugate axes bisect
each other at their intersection point, C. Each branch of a hyperbola gets closer
and closer to the asymptotes, in the direction towards which the branch extends.
The equations of the asymptotes can be determined by replacing 1 in the standard
equation by 0. The asymptotes can be drawn as the extended diagonals of the
auxiliary rectangle determined by the transverse and conjugate axes. Recall that,
for any point on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its distances
from the foci is 2a.
PY
In the standard equation, aside from being positive, there are no other re-
strictions on a and b. In fact, a and b can even be equal. The orientation of the
hyperbola is determined by the variable appearing in the first term (the positive
term): the corresponding axis is where the two branches will open. For example,
if the variable in the first term is x, the hyperbola is “horizontal”: the transverse
O
axis is horizontal, and the branches open to the left and right in the direction of
the x-axis. C
Example 1.4.3. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and asymp-
totes of the hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include
these points and lines, the transverse and conjugate axes, and the auxiliary rect-
angle.
D
(y + 2)2 (x − 7)2
(1) − =1
25 9
E
2 2
Solution.
√ (1) From
√ a = 25 and b = 9, we have a = 5, b = 3, and c =
a2 + b2 = 34 ≈ 5.8. The hyperbola is vertical. To determine the asymp-
2 (x−7)2
totes, we write (y+2)
25
− 9
= 0, which is equivalent to y + 2 = ± 53 (x − 7).
We can then solve this for y.
D
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 3 units to the left and right
of the center.
52
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
C
(2) We first change the given equation to standard form.
(x + 4)2 (y − 3)2
− =1
5 4
EP
√ √
We have a = 5 ≈ 2.2 and b = 2. Thus, c = a2 + b2 = 3. The hyperbola
2 2
is horizontal. To determine the asymptotes, we write (x+4) 5
− (y−3)
4
= 0
2
which is equivalent to y − 3 = ± 5 (x + 4), and solve for y.
√
D
center: C(−4, 3)
foci: F1 (−7, 3) and F2 (−1, 3)
√ √
vertices: V1 (−4 − 5, 3) ≈ (−6.2, 3) and V2 (−4 + 5, 3) ≈ (−1.8, 3)
asymptotes: y = √2 x + √8 + 3 and y = − √25 x − √8 +3
5 5 5
The conjugate axis drawn has its endpoints b = 2 units above and below
the center.
53
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
C
Example 1.4.4. The foci of a hyperbola are (−5, −3) and (9, −3). For any point
on the hyperbola, the absolute value of the difference of its of its distances from
D
the foci is 10. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola.
E
Solution. The midpoint (2, −3) of the foci is the center of the hyperbola. Each
focus is c = 7 units away from the center. From the given difference, 2a = 10 so
a = 5. Also, b2 = c2 − a2 = 24. The hyperbola is horizontal (because the foci are
EP
(x − 2)2 (y + 3)2
− = 1. 2
25 24
D
Example 1.4.5. √ A hyperbola has vertices (−4, −5) and (−4, 9), and one of its
foci is (−4, 2 − 65). Find its standard equation.
Solution. The midpoint (−4, 2) of the vertices is the center of the hyperbola,
which is vertical (because the vertices are vertically aligned).
√ Each vertex is
a = 7 units away from the center. The given focus is c = 65 units away from
the center. Thus, b2 = c2 − a2 = 16, and the standard equation is
(y − 2)2 (x + 4)2
− = 1. 2
49 16
54
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.2
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and asymptotes of the hy-
perbola with equation 9x2 − 4y 2 − 90x − 32y = −305. Sketch the graph, and
include these points and lines, along with the auxiliary rectangle.
√ √
Answer: center C(5, −4), foci F1 (5, −4−2 13) and F2 (5, −4+2 13), vertices
V1 (5, −10) and V2 (5, 2), asymptotes y = − 32 x + 72 and y = 23 x − 23
2
PY
O
C
E D
2. A hyperbola has vertices (1, 9) and (13, 9), and one of its foci is (−2, 9). Find
(x − 7)2 (y − 9)2
EP
Example 1.4.6. An explosion was heard by two stations 1200 m apart, located
at F1 (−600, 0) and F2 (600, 0). If the explosion was heard in F1 two seconds before
it was heard in F2 , identify the possible locations of the explosion. Use 340 m/s
as the speed of sound.
Solution. Using the given speed of sound, we can deduce that the sound traveled
340(2) = 680 m farther in reaching F2 than in reaching F1 . This is then the
difference of the distances of the explosion from the two stations. Thus, the
explosion is on a hyperbola with foci are F1 and F2 , on the branch closer to F1 .
55
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
We have c = 600 and 2a = 680, so a = 340 and b2 = c2 − a2 = 244400.
O
The explosion could therefore be anywhere on the left branch of the hyperbola
x2 y2
115600
− 244400 = 1. 2
Seatwork/Homework 1.4.3
C
? 1. Two stations, located at M (−1.5, 0) and N (1.5, 0) (units are in km), simulta-
neously send sound signals to a ship, with the signal traveling at the speed of
D
0.33 km/s. If the signal from N was received by the ship four seconds before
the signal it received from M , find the equation of the curve containing the
E
x2 y2
possible location of the ship. Answer: 0.4356 − 1.8144 = 1 (right branch)
EP
Exercises 1.4
1. Give the coordinates of the center, foci, vertices, and the asymptotes of the
hyperbola with the given equation. Sketch the graph, and include these points
and lines.
D
x2 y2
(a) − =1
36 64
y2 x2
(b) − =1
25 16
(c) (x − 1)2 − y 2 = 4
(y + 2)2 (x + 3)2
(d) − =1
15 10
(e) 3x2 − 2y 2 − 42x − 16y = −67
(f) 25x2 − 39y 2 + 150x + 390y = −225
56
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
PY
Item Asymptotes
O
(a) y = ± 34 x
(b) y = ± 54 x
(c)
C
y = x − 1, y = −x + 1
q q
(d) y = ± 32 x ± 3 32 − 2
q q
D
(e) y = ± 2 x ∓ 7 32 − 4
3
39
EP
D
(a) (b)
57
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(c) (d)
O
C
(e) (f)
D
2. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola which satisfies the given condi-
tions.
E
(a) foci (−4, −3) and (−4, 13), the absolute value of the difference of the
distances of any point from the foci is 14
(y − 5)2 (x + 4)2
EP
Answer: − =1
49 15
(b) vertices (−2, 8) and (8, 8), a focus (12, 8)
(x − 3)2 (y − 8)2
Answer: − =1
25 56
D
(c) center (−6, 9), a vertex (−6, 15), conjugate axis of length 12
(y − 9)2 (x + 6)2
Answer: − =1
25 36
(d) asymptotes y = 34 x + 13 and y = − 43 x + 41
3
, a vertex (−1, 7)
(x − 5)2 (y − 7)2
Answer: − =1
36 64
Solution. The asymptotes intersect at (5, 7). This is the center. The
distance of the given vertex from the center is a = 6. This vertex and
center are aligned horizontally, so the hyperbola has equation of the form
(x−h)2 2
a2
− (y−k)
b2
= 1. The asymptotes consequently have the form y − k =
58
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
± ab (x − h), and thus, have slopes ± ab . From the given asymptotes, b
a
= 43 .
Since a = 6, then b = 8. The standard equation is then
(x − 5)2 (y − 7)2
− = 1.
36 64
(e) asymptotes y = 31 x + 5
and y = − 31 x + 37 , a focus (1, 12)
3
(y − 2)2 (x − 1)2
Answer: − =1
10 90
Solution. The asymptotes intersect at (1, 2). This is the center. The
distance of the given focus from the center is c = 10. This focus and
center are aligned vertically, so the hyperbola has equation of the form
(y−k)2 2
− (x−h)
PY
a2 b2
= 1. The asymptotes consequently have the form y − k =
± b (x − h), and thus, have slopes ± ab . From the given asymptotes, ab = 13 ,
a
so b = 3a.
c2 = 100 = a2 + b2 = a2 + (3a)2 = 10a2
Thus, a2 = 10, and b2 = 9a2 = 90. The standard equation is
O
(y − 2)2 (x − 1)2
− = 1.
10 90
C
3. Two control towers are located at points Q(−500, 0) and R(500, 0), on a
straight shore where the x-axis runs through (all distances are in meters).
At the same moment, both towers sent a radio signal to a ship out at sea, each
D
traveling at 300 m/µs. The ship received the signal from Q 3 µs (microseconds)
before the message from R.
E
(a) Find the equation of the curve containing the possible location of the
x2 y2
ship. Answer: − = 1 (left branch)
202500 47500
EP
(b) Find the coordinates (rounded off to two decimal places) of the ship if it
is 200 m from the shore (y = 200). Answer: (−610.76, 200)
Solution. Since the time delay between the two signals is 3 µs, then the differ-
ence between the distances traveled by the two signals is 300 · 3 = 900 m. The
D
59
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1.5. More Problems on Conic Sections
Lesson Outline
PY
(1) Conic sections with associated equations in general form
(2) Problems involving characteristics of various conic sections
(3) Solving situational problems involving conic sections
O
Introduction
In this lesson, we will identify the conic section from a given equation. We
C
will analyze the properties of the identified conic section. We will also look at
problems that use the properties of the different conic sections. This will allow
us to synthesize what has been covered so far.
D
1.5.1. Identifying the Conic Section by Inspection
E
that is, the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same. However, it does not follow
that if the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are the same, the graph is a circle.
General Equation Standard Equation graph
D
2 2 1 2 3 2
(A) 2x + 2y − 2x + 6y + 5 = 0 x − 2 + y + 2 = 0 point
2 2 2 2
(B) x + y − 6x − 8y + 50 = 0 (x − 3) + (y − 4) = −25 empty set
60
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let us recall the general form of the equations of the other conic sections. We
may write the equations of conic sections we discussed in the general form
Ax2 + By 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0.
Ax2 + Ay 2 + Cx + Dy + E = 0
PY
(2) Parabola: exactly one of x2 or y 2 appears
O
Examples: 3x2 − 12x + 2y + 26 = 0 (opens downward)
− 2y 2 + 3x + 12y − 15 = 0 (opens to the right)
C
(3) Ellipse: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have the same
sign and are unequal
Examples: 2x2 + 5y 2 + 8x − 10y − 7 = 0 (horizontal major axis)
D
4x2 + y 2 − 16x − 6y + 21 = 0 (vertical major axis)
If A = B, we will classify the conic as a circle, instead of an ellipse.
E
(4) Hyperbola: both x2 and y 2 appear, and their coefficients A and B have dif-
ferent signs
Examples: 5x2 − 3y 2 − 20x − 18y − 22 = 0 (horizontal transverse axis)
− 4x2 + y 2 + 24x + 4y − 36 = 0 (vertical transverse axis)
D
(x − 2)2 (y + 1)2
(2) 4x2 + 9y 2 − 16x + 18y + 61 = 0 =⇒ + = −1
32 22
=⇒ empty set
61
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(x − 2)2 (y + 1)2
(3) 4x2 − 9y 2 − 16x − 18y + 7 = 0 =⇒ − =0
32 22
2
=⇒ two lines: y + 1 = ± (x − 2)
3
PY
Seatwork/Homework 1.5.1
The graphs of the following equations are (nondegenerate) conic sections. Identify
O
the conic section.
(1) 5x2 − 3y 2 + 10x − 12y = 22 Answer: hyperbola
(2) 2y 2 − 5x − 12y = 17
C Answer: parabola
(3) 3x2 + 3y 2 + 42x − 12y = −154 Answer: circle
2
(4) 3x + 6x + 4y = 18 Answer: parabola
D
2 2
(5) 7x + 3y − 14x + 12y = −14 Answer: ellipse
(6) −4x2 + 3y 2 + 24x − 12y = 36 Answer: hyperbola
E
The following examples require us to use the properties of different conic sections
at the same time.
Example 1.5.1. A circle has center at the focus of the parabola y 2 + 16x + 4y =
D
44, and is tangent to the directrix of this parabola. Find its standard equation.
Solution. The standard equation of the parabola is (y + 2)2 = −16(x − 3). Its
vertex is V (3, −2). Since 4c = 16 or c = 4, its focus is F (−1, −2) and its directrix
is x = 7. The circle has center at (−1, −2) and radius 8, which is the distance
from F to the directrix. Thus, the equation of the circle is
(x + 1)2 + (y + 2)2 = 64. 2
Example 1.5.2. The vertices and foci of 5x2 − 4y 2 + 50x + 16y + 29 = 0 are,
respectively, the foci and vertices of an ellipse. Find the standard equation of
this ellipse.
62
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We first write the equation of the hyperbola in standard form:
(x + 5)2 (y − 2)2
− = 1.
16 20
For this hyperbola, using the notations ah , bh , and ch to refer to a, b, and √
c of
the standard
p equation of the hyperbola, respectively, we have ah = 4, bh = 2 5,
2 2
ch = ah + bh = 6, so we have the following points:
center: (−5, 2)
vertices: (−9, 2) and (−1, 2)
foci: (−11, 2) and (1, 2).
PY
It means that, for the ellipse, we have these points:
center: (−5, 2)
vertices: (−11, 2) and (1, 2)
foci: (−9, 2) and (−1, 2).
O
p √
In this case, ce = 4 and ae = 6, so that be = a2e − c2e = 20. The standard
equation of the ellipse is
C
(x + 5)2 (y − 2)2
+ = 1. 2
36 20
D
Seatwork/Homework 1.5.2
1. Find the standard equation of all circles having center at a focus of 21x2 −
E
2. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola one branch of which has focus and
vertex that are the same as those of x2 − 6x + 8y = 23, and whose conjugate
axis is on the directrix of the same parabola.
(y − 6)2 (x − 3)2
D
Answer: − =1
4 12
Exercises 1.5
1. The graphs of the following equations are non-degenerate conic sections. Iden-
tify the conic section.
63
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) 2x2 + 24x − 5y = −57 Answer: parabola
2. The graphs of the following equations are degenerate conic sections. What are
the specific graphs?
3. An ellipse has equation 25x2 + 16y 2 + 150x − 32y = 159. Find the standard
equations of all parabolas whose vertex is a focus of this ellipse and whose
focus is a vertex of this ellipse.
PY
Answer: (x + 3)2 = −8(y + 2), (x + 3)2 = 32(y + 2), (x + 3)2 = −32(y − 4),
and (x + 3)2 = 8(y − 4)
O
(x + 3)2 (y − 1)2
+ = 1.
16 25
C
Its center is (−3, 1). Since a = 5 and b = 4, we get c = 3, so the vertices are
P (−3, −4) and S(−3, 6), while its foci are Q(−3, −2) and R(−3, 4). We then
get four parabolas satisfying the conditions of the problem. The focal distance
D
indicated below is the distance from the vertex to the focus.
4. Find the standard equation of the hyperbola whose conjugate axis is on the
directrix of the parabola y 2 + 12x + 6y = 39, having the focus of the parabola
as one of its foci, and the vertex of the parabola as one of its vertices.
(x − 7)2 (y + 3)2
Answer: − =1
9 27
64
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x = 7, its conjugate axis, and a vertex at (4, −3). Its center is then C(7, −3).
The conjugate axis is vertical so the hyperbola is horizontal, with constants
ah = CV = 3 and ch = CF = 6, so b2h = c2h − a2h = 27. The standard equation
of the required hyperbola is
(x − 7)2 (y + 3)2
− = 1.
9 27
5. Find the standard equation of the parabola opening to the left whose axis
contains the major axis of the ellipse x2 + 4y 2 − 10x − 24y + 45 = 0, whose
focus is the center of the ellipse, and which passes through the covertices of
this ellipse. Answer: (y − 3)2 = −4(x − 6)
PY
Solution. The standard form of the ellipse is
(x − 5)2 (y − 3)2
+ = 1.
16 4
Its center (5, 3) is the focus of the parabola. Since b = 2, its covertices are
O
W1 (5, 1) and W2 (5, 5). The vertex of the parabola, c units to the right of (5, 3),
is (5 + c, 3). Its equation can be written as (y − 3)2 = −4c(x − (5 + c)). Since
C
(5, 5) is a point on this parabola, we have (5 − 3)2 = −4c(5 − (5 + c)). Solving
this equation for c > 0 yields c = 1. Therefore, the standard equation of the
required parabola is (y − 3)2 = −4(x − 6).
D
6. Find the standard equation of the ellipse whose major and minor axes are the
transverse and conjugate axes (not necessarily in that order) of the hyperbola
(x − 2)2 (y + 3)2
E
(which is horizontal and has length 2bh = 6) is longer than its transverse axis
(length 2ah = 4), the ellipse is horizontal. Its major axis has length 2ae = 6
and its minor axis has length 2be = 4, so ae = 3 and be = 2. The ellipse shares
the same center as the hyperbola. Thus, the standard equation of the required
ellipse is
(x − 2)2 (y + 3)2
+ = 1.
9 4
7. If m 6= −3, 2, find the value(s) of m so that the graph of
(2m − 4)x2 + (m + 3)y 2 = (m + 3)(2m − 4)
is
65
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) a circle,
(b) a horizontal ellipse,
(c) a vertical ellipse,
(d) a hyperbola (is it horizontal or vertical?), or
(e) the empty set.
Answer: (a) m = 7, (b) 2 < m < 7, (c) m > 7, (d) −3 < m < 2 (horizontal),
(e) m < −3
PY
x2 y2
+ = 1.
m + 3 2m − 4
(a) The graph is a circle if m + 3 = 2m − 4 > 0 (positive, so the graph is not
a point or the empty set). This happens if m = 7.
O
(b) We require 0 < 2m − 4 < m + 3. Thus, 2 < m < 7.
(c) We require 0 < m + 3 < 2m − 4. Thus, m > 7.
C
(d) We need m + 3 and 2m − 4 to have different signs. We consider two cases.
i. If m + 3 < 0 < 2m − 4, then m < −3 AND m > 2, which cannot
happen.
D
ii. If 2m − 4 < 0 < m + 3, then −3 < m < 2. In this case, the equation
can be written, with positive denominators, as
E
x2 y2
− = 1.
EP
m + 3 4 − 2m
The hyperbola is horizontal.
(e) The remaining case is when m < −3. In this case, m + 3 < 0 and
2m − 4 < 0. This makes the expression
D
x2 y2
+
m + 3 2m − 4
negative, and never equal to 1. The graph is then the empty set.
66
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1.6. Systems of Nonlinear Equations
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Review systems of linear equations
(2) Solving a system involving one linear and one quadratic equation
O
(3) Solving a system involving two quadratic equations
(4) Applications of systems of nonlinear equations
C
Introduction
After recalling the techniques used in solving systems of linear equations in
Grade 8, we extend these methods to solving a system of equations to systems
D
in which the equations are not necessarily linear. In this lesson, the equations
are restricted to linear and quadratic types, although it is possible to adapt the
methodology to systems with other types of equations. We focus on quadratic
E
no solution. The latter is possible because of the quadratic formula. Teaching Notes
Recall that the
task of solving a
system of
1.6.1. Review of Techniques in Solving Systems of Linear equations is
Equations equivalent to
finding points of
D
intersection.
Recall the methods we used to solve systems of linear equations. There were Teaching Notes
Systems of linear
three methods used: substitution, elimination, and graphical. equations and
solving them were
Example 1.6.1. Use the substitution method to solve the system, and sketch introduced and
the graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection. studied in Grade 8
at the last part of
Quarter I.
4x + y = 6
5x + 3y = 4
Solution. Isolate the variable y in the first equation, and then substitute into the
second equation.
67
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4x + y = 6
=⇒ y = 6 − 4x
5x + 3y = 4
5x + 3(6 − 4x) = 4
−7x + 18 = 4
x=2
y = 6 − 4(2) = −2
PY
Example 1.6.2. Use the elimination method to solve the system, and sketch the
graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.
2x + 7 = 3y
O
4x + 7y = 12
Solution. We eliminate first the variable x. Rewrite the first equation wherein
C
only the constant term is on the right-hand side of the equation, then multiply
it by −2, and then add the resulting equation to the second equation.
D
2x − 3y = −7
(−2)(2x − 3y) = (−2)(−7)
E
−4x + 6y = 14
EP
−4x + 6y = 14
4x + 7y = 12
13y = 26
y=2
D
1
x=−
2
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.1
Use either substitution or elimination method to solve the system, and sketch the
graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the point of intersection.
x − 3y = 5
1.
2x + 5y = −1
68
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: (2, −1)
PY
5x + 3y = 4
2.
3x + 5y = 9
O
Answer: 21 , 32
C
E D
EP
D
We begin our extension with a system involving one linear equation and one
quadratic equation. In this case, it is always possible to use substitution by
solving the linear equation for one of the variables.
Example 1.6.3. Solve the following system, and sketch the graphs in one Carte-
sian plane.
x−y+2=0
y − 1 = x2
69
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. We solve for y in terms of x in the first equation, and substitute this
expression to the second equation.
x−y+2=0 =⇒ y =x+2
y − 1 = x2
√ √ √
(x + 2) − 1 = x2 1+ 5 1+ 5 5+ 5
x= =⇒ y = +2=
x2 − x − 1 = 0 2√ 2√ 2√
√ 1− 5 1− 5 5− 5
1± 5 x= =⇒ y = +2=
x= 2 2 2
2
PY
√ √ ! √ √ !
1+ 5 5+ 5 1− 5 5− 5
Solutions: , and ,
2 2 2 2
O
while the second equation represents a parabola with vertex at (0, 1) and which
opens upward. C
E D
EP
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.2
D
Solve each system, and sketch the graphs in one Cartesian plane showing the
point(s) of intersection.
x2 + y 2 = 16
1.
x−y =4
70
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
this expression into the first equation.
x2 + y 2 = 16 =⇒ (y + 4)2 + y 2 = 16
y 2 + 8y + 16 + y 2 = 16
2y 2 + 8y = 0
y = 0 or y = −4
Teaching Notes
We substitute each
y = 0 =⇒ x = 4 and y = −4 =⇒ x = 0 value of y (0 and
−4) to the second
Solutions: (4, 0) and (0, −4)
PY
equation x − y = 4
(or x = y + 4).
O
C
E D
EP
y = x2
2.
x = y2
D
Solution. Since the equations represent parabolas, we can use either of them
to isolate one variable. This is in fact the form in which both equations are
given. Substituting y = x2 into x = y 2 , we get
x = y 2 =⇒ x = (x2 )2
x4 − x = 0
x(x3 − 1) = 0
x = 0 or x = 1
71
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x = 0 =⇒ y = 0 and x = 1 =⇒ y = 1
Solutions: (0, 0) and (1, 1)
PY
O
1.6.3. Solving Systems of Equations Using Elimination
C
Elimination method is also useful in systems of nonlinear equations. Sometimes,
some systems need both techniques (substitution and elimination) to solve them.
Example 1.6.4. Solve the following system:
D
y 2 − 4x − 6y = 11
4(3 − x) = (y − 3)2 .
E
y 2 + 4x − 6y = 3
72
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The graphs of the equations in the preceding example with the points of
intersection are shown below.
PY
O
Usually, the general form is more convenient to use in solving systems of
C
equations. However, sometimes the solution can be simplified by writing the
equations in standard form. Moreover, the standard form is best for graphing.
Let us again solve the previous example in a different way.
D
Solution 2. By completing the square, we can change the first equation into stan-
dard form:
E
y 2 − 4x − 6y = 11 =⇒ 4(x + 5) = (y − 3)2 .
EP
4(x + 5) = (y − 3)2
4(3 − x) = (y − 3)2
73
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. Expanding both equations, we obtain
x2 + y 2 − 6x − 10y + 24 = 0
x2 + y 2 + 2y − 24 = 0.
PY
contains the
solutions of the For convenience, we choose the second equation.
original system. In
fact, this is the line
passing through x2 + y 2 + 2y − 24 = 0
the common points
of the two circles.
(8 − 2y)2 + y 2 + 2y − 24 = 0
y 2 − 6y + 8 = 0
O
y = 2 or y = 4
y = 2 =⇒ x = 8 − 2(2) = 4
C and y = 4 =⇒ x = 8 − 2(4) = 0
The solutions are (4, 2) and (0, 4).
√ The graphs of both equations are circles. One has center (3, 5) and radius
D
10, while the other has center (0, −1) and radius 5. The graphs with the points
of intersection are show below.
E
EP
D
74
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.3
Solve the system, and graph the curves in one Cartesian plane showing the
point(s) of intersection.
x2 + y 2 = 25
1. 2 2
x +y =1
18 32
Answer: (3, 4), (−3, 4), (3, −4), and (−3, −4)
PY
O
C
D
E
x2 + 2y − 12 = 0
2.
x2 + y 2 = 36
EP
√ √
Answer: (0, 6), 2 5, −4 , and −2 5, −4
D
75
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(x − 1)2 + (y − 3)2 = 10
3.
x2 + (y − 1)2 = 5
PY
O
C
E D
indicates the length of the diagonal. Screens of the same size can come in different
shapes. Wide-screen TV’s usually have screens with aspect ratio 16 : 9, indicating
the ratio of the width to the height. Older TV models often have aspect ratio
4 : 3. A 40-inch LED TV has screen aspect ratio 16 : 9. Find the length and the
width of the screen.
Solution. Let w represent the width and h the height of the screen. Then, by
Pythagorean Theorem, we have the system
w2 + h2 = 402 =⇒ w2 + h2 = 1600
w = 16 =⇒ h = 9w
h 9 16
76
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2
2 2 2 9w
w + h = 1600 =⇒ w + = 1600
16
337w2
= 1600
256
r
409 600
w= ≈ 34.86
337
19x 19(34.86)
h= ≈ = 19.61
16 16
Therefore, a 40-inch TV with aspect ratio 16 : 9 is about 35.86 inches wide and
2
PY
19.61 inches high.
Seatwork/Homework 1.6.4
O
piece with perimeter 28 cm is to be cut as shown. Find the dimensions of
the rectangular piece. C Answer: 6 cm × 8 cm
E D
EP
D
Exercises 1.6
1. Solve the system, and graph the curves.
y = 2x + 4
(a)
y = 2x2
Answer: (−1, 2) and (2, 8)
77
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
x2 + y 2 = 25
(b)
2x − 3y = −6
C
Answer: (3, 4) and − 63
13
16
, − 13
E D
EP
D
x2 + y 2 = 12
(c)
x2 − y 2 = 4
√ √ √ √
Answer: 2 2, 2 , −2 2, 2 , 2 2, −2 , and −2 2, −2
78
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
x2 − 4y 2 = 200
(d)
x + 2y = 100
Answer: 51, 49
2
O
C
E D
EP
1 (x + 1)2 − (y + 2)2 = 1
4
(e)
(y + 2)2 = − 1 (x − 1)
4
√ √
5 5
Answer: (1, −2), −4, −2 + , and −4, −2 −
D
2 2
79
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 2. A laptop has screen size 13 inches with aspect ratio 5 : 4. Find the length and
the width of the screen. Answer: 10.15 in × 8.12 in
? 3. What are the dimensions of a rectangle whose perimeter is 50 cm and diagonal
18 cm? Answer: 14.9 cm × 10.1 cm
2
4. The graph of 2xy−y +5x+20 = 0 is a rotated hyperbola. Find the intersection
of this hyperbola with the graph of 3x + 2y = 3. (The graph is not required.)
71
Answer: (−1, 3), 21 , − 25
7
5. For what values of a will the system
PY
x2 + y 2 + 2x − 1 = 0
x−y+a=0
O
C
E D
EP
D
80
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unit 2
Mathematical Induction
PY
O
C
E D
EP
81
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2.1. Review of Sequences and Series
Lesson Outline
PY
(1) Sequences and series
(2) Different types of sequences and series (Fibonacci sequence, arithmetic and
geometric sequence and series, and harmonic series)
(3) Difference between sequence and series
Introduction
O
Pose the following problem to the class:
C
Jason’s classroom is on the second floor of the school. He can take
one or two steps of the stairs in one leap. In how many ways can
D
Jason climb the stairs if it has 16 steps?
E
EP
D
Get students to suggest strategies they can use to solve this problem. Lead
or encourage them to try out smaller number of steps and find a pattern. Work
with the class to complete the following table (on the board):
82
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Number of Steps Number of Ways
in the Stairs to Climb the Stairs
1 1
2 2 Teaching Notes
This is equivalent
3 3 to the number of
ways to express a
4 5 number (number of
steps in the stairs)
as a sum of 1’s and
5 8 2’s. For example,
we can write 3 as a
.. ..
. . sum of 1’s and 2’s
PY
in three ways:
2 + 1, 1 + 2, and
1 + 1 + 1. In 2 + 1,
The students should be able to recognize the Fibonacci sequence. Ask the it means Jason
leaps 2 steps first,
students to recall what Fibonacci sequences are and where they had encountered then 1 step to
this sequence before. finish the
O
three-step stairs.
In this lesson, we will review the definitions and different types of sequences
and series. C
Lesson Proper
Recall the following definitions:
D
A sequence is a function whose domain is the set of positive integers
or the set {1, 2, 3, . . . , n}.
E
EP
83
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 2.1.1. Determine the first five terms of each defined sequence, and
give their associated series.
(1) {2 − n} (3) {(−1)n }
(2) {1 + 2n + 3n2 } (4) {1 + 2 + 3 + · · · + n}
PY
(2) an = 1 + 2n + 3n2
First five terms: a1 = 1 + 2 · 1 + 3 · 12 = 6, a2 = 17, a3 = 34, a4 = 57, a5 = 86
Associated series: S = 6 + 17 + 34 + 57 + 86 = 200
O
(3) an = (−1)n
First five terms: a1 = (−1)1 = −1, a2 = (−1)2 = 1, a3 = −1, a4 = 1,
a5 = −1
C
Associated series: S = −1 + 1 − 1 + 1 − 1 = −1
(4) an = 1 + 2 + 3 + · · · + n
D
First five terms: a1 = 1, a2 = 1+2 = 3, a3 = 1+2+3 = 6, a4 = 1+2+3+4 =
10, a5 = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = 15
E
Associated series: S = 1 + 3 + 6 + 10 + 15 = 35 2
EP
84
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A geometric sequence is a sequence in which each term after the first
is obtained by multiplying the preceding term by a constant (called
the common ratio).
If the nth term of a geometric sequence is an and the common ratio is r, then
an = a1 rn−1 .
PY
Sn = n
a1 (1 − r )
6 1.
if r =
(1 − r)
O
When −1 < r < 1, the infinite geometric series Teaching Notes
The proof of the
fact that the
a1 + a1 r + a1 r2 + · · · + a1 rn−1 + · · · infinite geometric
Seatwork/Homework
1. Write SEQ if the given item is a sequence, and write SER if it is a series.
85
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) 2, 4, 9, 16, 25, . . . Answer: O
1 1 1
(c) 4
, , , 1 ,...
16 64 256
Answer: G
1 2 3 4
(d) 3
, , , ,...
9 27 81
Answer: O
1 1 1 1 1
(e) 5
, , , , ,...
9 13 17 21
Answer: A
(f) 4, 6, 10, 16, 26, . . . Answer: F
√ √ √ √
(g) 3, 4, 5, 6, . . . Answer: O
(h) 0.1, 0.01, 0.001, 0.0001, . . . Answer: G
3. Determine the first five terms of each defined sequence, and give their associ-
ated series.
PY
(a) {1 + n − n2 }
Answer: a1 = 1, a2 = −1, a3 = −5, a4 = −11, a5 = −19
Associated series: 1 − 1 − 5 − 11 − 19 = −35
O
(b) {1 − (−1)n+1 }
Answer: a1 = 0, a2 = 2, a3 = 0, a4 = 2, a5 = 0
Associated series: 0 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 0 = 4
(c) a1 = 3 and an = 2an−1 + 3 for n ≥ 2
C
Answer: a1 = 3, a2 = 9, a3 = 21, a4 = 45, a5 = 93
Associated series: 1 − 1 − 5 − 11 − 19 = −35
D
(d) {1 · 2 · 3 · · · n}
Answer: a1 = 1, a2 = 1 · 2 = 2, a3 = 1 · 2 · 3 = 6, a4 = 24, a5 = 120
E
4. Identify the series (and write NAGIG if it is not arithmetic, geometric, and
infinite geometric series), and determine the sum (and write NO SUM if it
cannot be summed up).
1 9841
(b) 81 + 27 + 9 + · · · + 81
Answer: Geometric, 81
(c) 1 + 3 + 6 + 10 + 15 + 21 + · · · + 55 Answer: NAGIG, 220
(d) −10 − 2 + 6 + · · · + 46 Answer: Arithmetic, 144
(e) 10 + 2 + 0.4 + 0.08 + · · · Answer: Infinite geometric, 12.5
1 1 1 1
(f) 2
+ + + + ···
3 5 7
Answer: NAGIG, NO SUM
10
(g) 1 − 0.1 + 0.01 − 0.001 + · · · Answer: Infinite geometric, 11
86
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2.2. Sigma Notation
Lesson Outline
PY
(1) Definition of and writing in sigma notation
(2) Evaluate sums written in sigma notation
(3) Properties of sigma notation
(4) Calculating sums using the properties of sigma notation
O
Introduction
The sigma notation is a shorthand for writing sums. In this lesson, we will
C
see the power of this notation in computing sums of numbers as well as algebraic
expressions.
D
2.2.1. Writing and Evaluating Sums in Sigma Notation
E
Mathematicians use the sigma notation to denote a sum. The uppercase Greek
letter Σ (sigma) is used to indicate a “sum.” The notation consists of several
components or parts.
EP
f (m) + f (m + 1) + f (m + 2) + · · · + f (n)
D
87
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 2.2.1. Expand each summation, and simplify if possible.
4 Xn
X
(1) (2i + 3) (3) ai
i=2 i=1
5
X X6 √
i n
(2) 2 (4)
i=0 n=1
n+1
4
X
(1) (2i + 3) = [2(2) + 3] + [2(3) + 3] + [2(4) + 3] = 27
PY
i=2
5
X
(2) 2i = 20 + 21 + 22 + 23 + 24 + 25 = 63
i=0
n
X
O
(3) ai = a1 + a2 + a3 + · · · + an
i=1
6 √ √ √ √ √
X
(4)
n 1
= +
2
+
3 2
+ +
5
+
6
C 2
n=1
n+1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(2) −1 + 2 − 3 + 4 − 5 + 6 − 7 + 8 − 9 + · · · − 25
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + · · · + a20
EP
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(4) 1 + + + + + + +
2 4 8 16 32 64 128
X1 100
1 1 1 1
D
Solution. (1) 1 + + + + · · · + =
2 3 4 100 n=1 n
(2) −1 + 2 − 3 + 4 − 5 + · · · − 25
= (−1)1 1 + (−1)2 2 + (−1)3 3 + (−1)4 4
+ (−1)5 5 + · · · + (−1)25 25
25
X
= (−1)j j
j=1
88
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) a2 + a4 + a6 + a8 + · · · + a20
= a2(1) + a2(2) + a2(3) + a2(4) + · · · + a2(10)
10
X
= a2i
i=1
X 1 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(4) 1 + + + + + + + = 2
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=0 2k
The sigma notation of a sum expression is not necessarily unique. For ex-
ample, the last item in the preceding example can also be expressed in sigma
notation as follows:
PY
X 1 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1+ + + + + + + = .
2 4 8 16 32 64 128 k=1 2k−1
However, this last sigma notation is equivalent to the one given in the example.
Seatwork/Homework 2.2.1
O
C
1. Expand each summation, and simplify if possible.
5
X
D
(a) (2 − 3k) Answer: −28
k=−1
n
X
E
(b) xj Answer: x + x2 + x3 + · · · + xn
j=1
EP
6
X
(c) (j 2 − j) Answer: 68
j=3
4
X
(d) (−1)k+1 k Answer: −2
D
k=1
3
X
(e) (an+1 − an ) Answer: a4 − a1
n=1
89
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
50
X
Teaching Notes
Equivalent answer: (c) 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + · · · + 101 Answer: (2k + 1)
1+3+5+· · ·+101 = k=0
51
X
(2k − 1) 4
X
k=1
(d) a4 + a8 + a12 + a16 Answer: a4k
k=1
4
X
1 1 1 1 (−1)k
(e) 1 − + − + Answer:
3 5 7 9 k=0
2k + 1
PY
We start with finding a formula for the sum of
n
X
i = 1 + 2 + 3 + ··· + n
i=1
O
in terms of n.
The sum can be evaluated in different ways. One informal but simple approach
is pictorial.
C
E D
EP
Teaching Notes
This illustration
D
Another way is to use the formula for an arithmetic series with a1 = 1 and
an = n:
n(a1 + an ) n(n + 1)
S= = .
2 2
We now derive some useful summation facts. They are based on the axioms
of arithmetic addition and multiplication.
90
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
n
X n
X
cf (i) = c f (i), c any real number.
i=m i=m
PY
=c f (i) 2
i=m
n
X n
X n
X
O
[f (i) + g(i)] = f (i) + g(i)
i=m i=m i=m
C
Proof.
n
X
D
[f (i) + g(i)]
i=m
= [f (m) + g(m)] + · · · + [f (n) + g(n)]
E
= f (i) + g(i) 2
i=m i=m
n
X
D
c = c(n − m + 1)
i=m
Proof.
n
X
c = c| + c + c{z+ · · · + }c
i=m n−m+1 terms
= c(n − m + 1) 2
91
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A special case of the above result which you might encounter more often is
the following:
Xn
c = cn.
i=1
Telescoping Sum
n
X
[f (i + 1) − f (i)] = f (n + 1) − f (m)
i=m
PY
Proof.
n
X
f (i + 1) − f (i)
i=m
O
= [f (m + 1) − f (m)] + [f (m + 2) − f (m + 1)]
+ [f (m + 3) − f (m + 2)] + · · · + [f (n + 1) − f (n)]
C
Note that the terms, f (m + 1), f (m + 2), . . . , f (n), all cancel out. Hence, we have
n
X
[f (i + 1) − f (i)] = f (n + 1) − f (m). 2
D
i=m
30
X
E
Solution.
30
X 30
X 30
X
(4i − 5) = 4i − 5
i=1 i=1 i=1
D
X30 X30
=4 i− 5
i=1 i=1
(30)(31)
=4 − 5(30)
2
= 1710 2
92
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
1 1 1 1
+ + + ··· +
1·2 2·3 3·4 99 · 100
X 99
1
=
i=1
i(i + 1)
99
X i+1−i
=
i=1
i(i + 1)
X99
i+1 i
= −
i=1
i(i + 1) i(i + 1)
PY
X99
1 1
= −
i=1
i i+1
X 99
1 1
=− −
O
i=1
i + 1 i
1
Using f (i) = and the telescoping-sum property, we get
i
C
X99
1 1 1 99
=− − = . 2
i(i + 1) 100 1 100
D
i=1
n
X
Example 2.2.5. Derive a formula for i2 using a telescoping sum with terms
E
i=1
f (i) = i3 .
EP
i=1
On the other hand, using expansion and the other properties of summation,
we have
n
X n
3 X
i − (i − 1)3 = (i3 − i3 + 3i2 − 3i + 1)
i=1 i=1
Xn Xn n
X
2
=3 i −3 i+ 1
i=1 i=1 i=1
X n
n(n + 1)
=3 i2 − 3 · + n.
i=1
2
93
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Equating the two results above, we obtain
X n
3n(n + 1)
3 i2 − + n = n3
i=1
2
Xn
6 i2 − 3n(n + 1) + 2n = 2n3
i=1
Xn
6 i2 = 2n3 − 2n + 3n(n + 1)
i=1
PY
= 2n(n2 − 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= 2n(n − 1)(n + 1) + 3n(n + 1)
= n(n + 1)[2(n − 1) + 3]
= n(n + 1)(2n + 1).
O
Finally, after dividing both sides of the equation by 6, we obtain the desired
formula n
X
i2 =
6
C
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
. 2
i=1
D
Seatwork/Homework 2.2.2
50
X
(a) (2 − 3k) Answer: −3725
EP
k=1
n
X
(b) (1 + 2j) Answer: 2n + n2
j=1
99
X
D
1
(c) √ √ Answer: 9
j=1
i+1+ i
Solution:
99 99 √ √
X 1 X 1 i+1− i
√ √ = √ √ ·√ √
j=1
i+1+ i j=1
i + 1 + i i + 1 − i
99
X √ √
= i+1− i
j=1
√ √
= 99 + 1 − 1
=9
94
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
n
X
2. If (i + 1)2 = an3 + bn2 + cn + d, what is a + b + c + d? Answer: 4
i=1
Exercises 2.2
PY
3 3 3 3
(b) 2i Answer: 0 + 2+ 4+ 6 + 2 + 3 10 + 3 12
i=0
3
X
(c) 3−i Answer: 9 + 3 + 1 + 1/3 + 1/9 + 1/27
i=−2
O
2. Write each expression in sigma notation.
12
X
2 3 4
(a) 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + · · · + 12
C12
Answer: ii
i=1
Teaching Notes
(b) (x − 5) + (x − 3) + (x − 1) + (x + 1) + (x + 3) + · · · + (x + 15) Another possible
D
7 answer for (b) is
X 11
Answer: [x + (2i + 1)]
X
[x + (2i − 7)].
i=1
i=−3
E
9
X
(c) a1 + a4 + a9 + a16 + · · · + a81 Answer: ai 2
EP
i=1
i=1
50
X
(b) [(5i − 2)(i + 3)] Answer: 230900
i=1
n
X 6n3 + 3n2 − 3n + 2
(c) (3i − 1)2 Answer:
i=1
2
30
X 30
X 30
X 3g(i) − f (i) + 7
4. If f (i) = 70 and g(i) = 50, what is the value of ?
i=1 i=1 i=1
2
Answer: 145
95
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
100
X 200
X
5. If s = i, express i in terms of s. Answer: 2s + 100000
i=1 i=1
Xn n
X
6. If s = ai , does it follow that a2i = s2 ?
i=1 i=1
2
X n
X
Answer: No. If s = ai = a1 + a2 , then a2i = a21 + a22 , while s2 =
i=1 i=1
a21 + 2a1 a2 + a22 .
n
X
7. Derive a formula for i3 by using a telescoping sum with terms f (i) = i4 .
PY
i=1
n2 (n + 1)2
Answer:
4
Lesson Outline
(1) State the Principle of Mathematical Induction
(2) Prove summation identities using mathematical induction
D
Introduction
We have derived and used formulas for the terms of arithmetic and geometric
sequences and series. These formulas and many other theorems involving positive
integers can be proven with the use of a technique called mathematical induction.
96
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2.3.1. Proving Summation Identities
There are many mathematical results that can be proven using mathematical
induction. In this lesson, we will focus on three main categories: summation
identities, divisibility statements, and inequalities.
We first state the Principle of Mathematical Induction, and see how the prin-
ciple works in general sense.
PY
(1) P (n0 ) is true (that is, the statement is true when n = n0 ).
(2) If P (k) is true for some integer k ≥ n0 , then P (k + 1) is true
(that is, if the statement is true for n = k, then it is also true for
n = k + 1).
O
Then the statement P (n) is true for all integers n ≥ n0 .
C
The Principle of Mathematical Induction is often compared to climbing an
infinite staircase. First, you need to be able to climb up to the first step. Second,
if you are on any step (n = k), you must be able to climb up to the next step
D
(n = k + 1). If you can do these two things, then you will be able to climb up
the infinite staircase.
E
EP
D
Part 1 Part 2
97
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
Standing Domino Tiles, by Nara Cute, 16 October 2015,
C
https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Wallpaper kartu domino.png. Public Domain.
Let us now take a look at some examples on the use of mathematical induction
D
in proving summation identities.
n(n + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + ··· + n =
2
EP
Solution. We need to establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Math-
ematical Induction.
D
Using the formula for n = k and adding k + 1 to both sides of the equation,
we get
k(k + 1)
1 + 2 + 3 + · · · + k + (k + 1) = + (k + 1)
2
k(k + 1) + 2(k + 1)
=
2
(k + 1)(k + 2)
PY
=
2
(k + 1) [(k + 1) + 1]
=
2
O
We have proven the two conditions required by the Principle of Mathematical
Induction. Therefore, the formula is true for all positive integers n.
C 2
Example 2.3.2. Use mathematical induction to prove the formula for the sum
of a geometric series with n terms:
a1 (1 − rn )
Sn = , r 6= 1.
D
1−r
Solution. Let an be the nth term of a geometric series. From Lesson 2.1, we know
E
also be proven by
mathematical
a1 (1 − r1 ) induction. Here,
= a1 = S 1 however, we simply
1−r recall a formula in
Lesson 2.1 because
The formula is true for n = 1. our focus in this
example is the
D
a1 (1 − rk+1 )
Sk+1 = .
1−r
We know that
Sk+1 = a1 + a2 + · · · + ak +ak+1
| {z }
Sk
= Sk + ak+1
99
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
a1 1 − r k
= + a1 rk
1−r
a1 1 − rk + a1 rk (1 − r)
=
1−r
a1 1 − r + rk − rk+1
k
=
1 −r
k+1
a1 1 − r
=
1−r
By the Principle of Mathematical Induction, we have proven that
a1 (1 − rn )
PY
Sn =
1−r
for all positive integers n. 2
O
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
12 + 22 + 32 + · · · + n2 =
6
for all positive integers n.
C
Solution. We again establish the two conditions stated in the Principle of Math-
D
ematical Induction.
Part 1
E
Part 2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
Assume: 12 + 22 + 32 + · · · + k 2 = .
6
D
Prove: 12 + 22 + 32 + · · · + k 2 + (k + 1)2
(k + 1)(k + 2) [2(k + 1) + 1]
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 3)
= .
6
12 + 22 + 32 + · · · + k 2 + (k + 1)2
k(k + 1)(2k + 1)
= + (k + 1)2
6
k(k + 1)(2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)2
=
6
100
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(k + 1) [k(2k + 1) + 6(k + 1)]
=
6
(k + 1) (2k 2 + 7k + 6)
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 3)
=
6
n(n + 1)(2n + 1)
12 + 22 + 32 + · · · + n2 =
6
for all positive integers n. 2
PY
Seatwork/Homework 2.3.1
O
n(n + 1)(2n + 7)
1 · 3 + 2 · 4 + 3 · 5 + · · · + n(n + 2) = .
6
C
Answer:
Part 1
D
1(1 + 1)[2(1) + 7] 2·9
= =3=1·3
6 6
E
Part 2
EP
k(k + 1)(2k + 7)
Assume: 1 · 3 + 2 · 4 + 3 · 5 + · · · + k(k + 2) =
6
To show: 1 · 3 + 2 · 4 + · · · + k(k + 2) + (k + 1)(k + 3)
(k + 1)(k + 2) [2(k + 1) + 7]
D
=
6
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 9)
=
6
1 · 3 + 2 · 4 + · · · + k(k + 2) + (k + 1)(k + 3)
k(k + 1)(2k + 7)
= + (k + 1)(k + 3)
6
(k + 1)
= [k(2k + 7) + 6(k + 3)]
6
(k + 1) 2
= 2k + 13k + 18
6
101
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(k + 1)(k + 2)(2k + 9)
=
6
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, the formula is true for all positive
Teaching Notes integers n.
Recall the
definition of
divisibility: an
integer n is 2.3.2. Proving Divisibility Statements
divisible by an
integer k if n = kr
for some integer r. We now prove some divisibility statements using mathematical induction.
Example 2.3.4. Use mathematical induction to prove that, for every positive
integer n, 7n − 1 is divisible by 6.
PY
Solution. Similar to what we did in the previous session, we establish the two
conditions stated in the Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1
O
71 − 1 = 6 = 6 · 1
71 − 1 is divisible by 6.
C
Part 2
Assume: 7k − 1 is divisible by 6.
D
To show: 7k+1 − 1 is divisible by 6.
7k+1 − 1 = 7 · 7k − 1 = 6 · 7k + 7k − 1 = 6 · 7k + (7k − 1)
E
Example 2.3.5. Use mathematical induction to prove that, for every nonnega-
tive integer n, n3 − n + 3 is divisible by 3.
102
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Part 1. Note that claim of the statement is that it is true for every nonnegative
integer n. This means that Part 1 should prove that the statement is true for
n = 0.
03 − 0 + 3 = 3 = 3(1)
03 − 0 + 3 is divisible by 3.
PY
(k + 1)3 − (k + 1) + 3 = k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k + 3
= (k 3 − k + 3) + 3k 2 + 3k
= 3a + 3k 2 + 3k
O
= 3(a + k 2 + k)
Seatwork/Homework 2.3.1
Use mathematical induction to prove each divisibility statement for all nonnega-
EP
tive integers n.
(1) 72n − 3 · 5n + 2 is divisible by 12.
Answer:
D
Part 1
72(0) − 3 · 50 + 2 = 1 − 3(1) + 2 = 0 = 12(0)
72(0) − 3 · 50 + 2 is divisible by 12
Part 2
Assume: 72k − 3 · 5k + 2 is divisible by 12
To show: 72(k+1) − 3 · 5(k+1) + 2 is divisible by 12
72(k+1) − 3 · 5(k+1) + 2
= 72 72k − 3 · 5 · 5k + 2
103
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
= 49 · 72k − 15 · 5k + 2
= 72k + 48 · 72k − 3 · 5k − 12 · 5k + 2
= 72k − 3 · 5k + 2 + 48 · 72k − 12 · 5k
= 72k − 3 · 5k + 2 + 12 4 · 72k − 5k
By the hypothesis,
72k − 3 · 5k + 2 is divisible by 12. The second term,
12 4 · 72k − 5k , is divisible by 12 because 4 · 72k − 5k is an integer. Hence
their sum, which is equal to 72(k+1) − 3 · 5(k+1) + 2, is divisible by 12.
Therefore, by the Principle of Math Induction, 72n − 3 · 5n + 2 is divisible by
12 for every nonnegative integer n.
PY
(2) n3 + 3n2 + 2n is divisible by 3.
Answer:
Part 1
O
03 + 3 · 02 + 2(0) = 0 = 3(0)
Thus, 03 + 3 · 02 + 2(0) is divisible by 3.
C
Part 2
Assume: k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k is divisible by 3.
=⇒ k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k = 3a, a integer
D
To show: (k + 1)3 + 3(k + 1)2 + 2(k + 1) is divisible by 3.
E
= (k 3 + 3k 2 + 2k) + 3k 2 + 9k + 6
= 3a + 3k 2 + 9k + 6
= 3(a + k 2 + 3k + 2)
D
Example 2.3.6. Use mathematical induction to prove that 2n > 2n for every
integer n ≥ 3.
104
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. Just like the previous example, we establish the two conditions in the
Principle of Mathematical Induction.
Part 1
23 = 8 > 6 = 2(3)
This confirms that 23 > 2(3).
Part 2
Assume: 2k > 2k, where k is an integer with k ≥ 3
To show: 2k+1 > 2(k + 1) = 2k + 2
PY
We compare the components of the assumption and the inequality we need to
prove. On the left-hand side, the expression is doubled. On the right-hand side,
the expression is increased by 2. We choose which operation we want to apply to
both sides of the assumed inequality.
O
Alternative 1. We double both sides.
Since 2k > 2k, by the multiplication property of inequality, we have 2 · 2k >
C
2 · 2k.
2k+1 > 2(2k) = 2k + 2k > 2k + 2 if k ≥ 3.
Hence, 2k+1 > 2(k + 1).
D
Alternative 2. We increase both sides by 2.
Since 2k > 2k, by the addition property of inequality, we have 2k + 2 > 2k + 2.
E
105
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
that 0! = 1 and, for every positive integer n, n! = 1 · 2 · 3 · · · n. The factorial also
satisfies the property that (n + 1)! = (n + 1) · n!.
Example 2.3.7. Use mathematical induction to prove that 3n < (n + 2)! for
every positive integer n. Can you refine or improve the result?
Part 1
31 = 3 < 6 = 3! = (1 + 2)! =⇒ 31 < (1 + 2)!
Thus, the desired inequality is true for n = 1.
PY
Part 2
Assume: 3k < (k + 2)!
To show: 3k+1 < (k + 3)!
O
Given that 3k < (k + 2)!, we multiply both sides of the inequality by 3 and
obtain
3 3k < 3 [(k + 2)!] .
C
This implies that
3 3k < 3 [(k + 2)!] < (k + 3) [(k + 2)!] , since k > 0,
D
and so
3k+1 < (k + 3)!.
E
Seatwork/Homework 2.3.3
106
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
Part 1
2(4) + 3 = 11 < 16 = 24
Thus, 2(4) + 3 <= 24 .
Part 2
Assume: 2k + 3 < 2k , k ≥ 4
To show: 2(k + 1) + 3 < 2k+1
2(k + 1) + 3 = 2k + 5 = (2k + 3) + 2
PY
< 2k + 2 < 2k + 2k = 2k+1
O
Exercises 2.3
n
X
(3) 2 · 3i−1 = 3n − 1
i=1
EP
k+1
X k
X
i−1
Hint: 2·3 = 2·3i−1 +2·3( k+1)−1 = 3k −1+2·3k = 3·3k −1 = 3k+1 −1
i=1 i=1
n
X n2 (n + 1)2
(4) i3 =
D
i=1
4
n [2a1 + (n − 1)d]
(5) a1 + (a1 + d) + (a1 + 2d) + · · · + [a1 + (n − 1)d] =
2
(6) 1 (1!) + 2 (2!) + · · · + n (n!) = (n + 1)! − 1
k+1
X k
X
Hint: i · i! = i · i! + (k + 1)(k + 1)! = (k + 1)! − 1 + (k + 1)(k + 1)! =
i=1 i=1
(k + 1)!(1 + k + 1) − 1 = (k + 2)! − 1
(7) 7n − 4n is divisible by 3
Hint: 7k+1 − 4k+1 = 7 · 7k − 4 · 4k = (3 + 4)7k − 4 · 4k = 3 · 7k + (7k − 4k )
107
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(8) 10n + 3 · 4n+2 + 5 is divisible by 9
Hint: 10k+1 +3·4k+3 +5 = 10·10k +3·4·4k+2 +5 = (9+1)10k +(9+3)4k+2 +5 =
9(10k + 4k+2 ) + 10k + 3 · 4k+2 + 5
(9) 11n+2 + 122n+1 is divisible by 133
Hint: 11k+3 +122k+3 = 11·11k+2 +122 ·122k+1 = 11·11k+2 +(133+11)122k+1 =
11(11k+2 + 122k+1 ) + 133 · 122k+1
(10) xn − y n is divisible by x − y for any positive integer n
Hint: xk+1 − y k+1 = x · xk − y · xk + y · xk − y · y k = (x − y)xk + y(xk − y k )
(11) xn + y n is divisible by x + y for any odd positive integer n
PY
Hint: xk+2 + y k+2 = x2 xk + y 2 y k = x2 xk + x2 y k − x2 y k + y 2 y k = x2 (xk + y k ) −
y k (x − y)(x + y)
(12) If 0 < a < 1, then 0 < an < 1 for any positive integer n
Hint: 0 < ak < 1 =⇒ 0 · a < ak · a < 1 · a =⇒ 0 < ak+1 < a < 1
O
(13) (1 + a)n > 1 + na for a > −1, a 6= 0 and n an integer greater than 1
Hint: (1 + a)k+1 > (1 + ka)(1 + a) = 1 + (k + 1)a + ka2 > 1 + (k + 1)a
C
(14) 2n > n2 for every integer n > 4
Hint: 2k+1 = 2 · 2k > 2k 2 = k 2 + k 2 > k 2 + 2k + 1 = (k + 1)2 . The last
D
inequality follows from (k − 1)2 > 2 for k > 4, which implies that k 2 > 2k + 1.
For k > 4, (k − 1)2 > 2
E
4
D
108
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) determine any term in (x + y)n , where n is a positive integer, without ex-
panding; and
(4) solve problems using mathematical induction and the Binomial Theorem.
Lesson Outline
(1) Expand (x + y)n for small values of n using Pascal’s Triangle
(2) Review the definition of and formula for combination Teaching Notes
The concept of
(3) State and prove the Binomial Theorem combination was
introduced in
(4) Compute all or specified terms of a binomial expansion Grade 10. In
particular, the
(5) Prove some combination identities using the Binomial Theorem concept was
PY
discussed with
Introduction competency codes
from M10SP-IIIc-1
to M10SP-IIId-e-1.
In this lesson, we study two ways to expand (a + b)n , where n is a positive
integer. The first, which uses Pascal’s Triangle, is applicable if n is not too big,
and if we want to determine all the terms in the expansion. The second method
O
gives a general formula for the expansion of (a + b)n for any positive integer n.
This formula is useful especially when n is large because it avoids the process of
going through all the coefficients for lower values of n obtained through Pascal’s
C
Triangle. Moreover, if only a specific term is required, it can be computed directly Teaching Notes
Calculations with
using a simple formula. Lastly, the theorem can be used to derive and prove some big numbers are
useful and interesting results about sums of combinations. required in many
D
of the examples
and exercises in
this section. The
2.4.1. Pascal’s Triangle and the Concept of Combination use of scientific
E
calculators is
desirable.
Consider the following powers of a + b: Teaching Notes
You may ask the
EP
109
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The preceding triangular array of numbers is part of what is called the Pas-
cal’s Triangle, named after the French mathematician, Blaise Pascal (1623-1662).
Some properties of the Triangle are the following:
(3) The second and second to the last number of each row correspond to the
row number.
PY
(5) The number of entries in a row is one more than the row number (or one
more than the number of entries in the preceding row).
(6) Every middle number after first row is the sum of the two numbers above
it.
O
It is the last statement which is useful in constructing the succeeding rows of the
triangle.
C
Example 2.4.1. Use Pascal’s Triangle to expand the expression (2x − 3y)5 .
Solution. We use the coefficients in the fifth row of the Pascal’s Triangle.
D
(2x − 3y)5 = (2x)5 + 5(2x)4 (−3y) + 10(2x)3 (−3y)2
+ 10(2x)2 (−3y)3 + 5(2x)(−3y)4
E
+ (−3y)5
= 32x5 − 240x4 y + 720x3 y 2 − 1080x2 y 3
EP
+ 810xy 4 − 243y 5 2
Example 2.4.2. Use Pascal’s Triangle to expand (a + b)8 .
Solution. We start with the sixth row (or any row of the Pascal’s Triangle that
D
we remember).
n=6: 1 6 15 20 15 6 1
n=7: 1 7 21 35 35 21 7 1
n=8: 1 8 28 56 70 56 28 8 1
Therefore, we get
(a + b)8 = a8 + 8a7 b + 28a6 b2 + 56a5 b3
+ 70a4 b4 + 56a3 b5 + 28a2 b6
+ 8ab7 + b8 2
110
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
We observe that, for each n, the expansion of (a + b)n starts with an
and the exponent of a in the succeeding terms decreases by 1, while
the exponent of b increases by 1. This observation will be shown to
be true in general.
Let us review the concept of combination. Recall that C(n, k) or nk counts
the number of ways of choosing k objects from a set of n objects. It is also useful
to know some properties of C(n, k):
PY
(2) C(n, 1) = C(n, n − 1) = n, and
These properties can explain some of the observations we made on the num-
O
bers in the Pascal’s Triangle. Also recall the general formula for the number of
combinations of n objects taken k at a time:
C(n, k) =
n
k
=
C
n!
k!(n − k)!
,
Solution.
5 5! 5!
EP
= = = 10
3 (5 − 3)!3! 2!3!
8 8! 10!
= = = 56 2
5 (8 − 5)!5! 3!5!
D
You may observe that the value of 53 and the fourth coefficient in the fifth
8
row of Pascal’s Triangle are the same. In the same manner, 5 is equal to the
sixth coefficient in the expansion of (a + b)8 (see Example 2.4.2). These observed
equalities are not coincidental, and they are, in fact, the essence embodied in the
Binomial Theorem, as you will see in the succeeding sessions.
Seatwork/Homework 2.4.1
111
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) (2a − b2 )3 Answer: 8a3 − 12a2 b2 + 6ab4 − b6
(c) (a + b)9
Answer: a9 +9a8 b+36a7 b2 +84a6 b3 +126a5 b4 +126a4 b5 +84a3 b6 +36a2 b7 +
9ab8 + b9
2. Compute.
5
(a) Answer: 10
2
9
(b) Answer: 36
7
PY
12
(c) Answer: 66
10
20
(d) Answer: 15504
5
O
n n(n − 1)
3. Prove: = .
2 2 C
Answer:
n n! n(n − 1)(n − 2)! n(n − 1)
= = =
2 (n − 2)!2! (n − 2)!2! 2
D
2.4.2. The Binomial Theorem
E
As the power n gets larger, the more laborious it would be to use Pascal’s Triangle
(and impractical to use long multiplication) to expand (a + b)n . For example,
EP
using Pascal’s Triangle, we need to compute row by row up to the thirtieth row
to know the coefficients of (a + b)30 . It is, therefore, delightful to know that it is
possible to compute the terms of a binomial expansion of degree n without going
through the expansion of all the powers less than n.
We now explain how the concept of combination is used in the expansion of
D
(a + b)n .
(a + b)n = (a + b)(a + b)(a + b) · · · (a + b)
| {z }
n factors
When the distributive law is applied, the expansion of (a + b)n consists of
terms of the form am bi , where 0 ≤ m, i ≤ n. This term is obtained by choosing
a for m of the factors and b for the rest of the factors. Hence, m + i = n, or
m = n − i. This means that the number of times the term an−i bi will appear
in the expansion of (a + b)n equals the number of ways of choosing (n − i) or i
112
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
factors from the n factors, which is exactly C(n, i). Therefore, we have
Xn
n n n−i i
(a + b) = a b.
i=0
i
PY
factor. The term a3 is obtained when a is chosen each time, while a2 b is obtained
when a is selected 2 times, or equivalently, b is selected exactly once.
We will give another proof of this result using mathematical induction. But
first, we need to prove a result about combinations.
O
Pascal’s Identity
If n and k are positive integers with k ≤ n, then
C
n+1 n n
= + .
k k k−1
D
Proof. The result follows from the combination formula. Teaching Notes
The formula can
E
also be proved
n n n! n! using the fact that
+ = + n
is the number
k k−1 k!(n − k)! (k − 1)!(n − k + 1)! k
EP
of ways to choose k
n!(n − k + 1) + n!(k) from n distinct
= objects. Suppose a
k!(n − k + 1)! is one of the n
objects. Then, in
n!(n − k + 1 + k) selecting k objects,
= either a is selected
k!(n + 1 − k)!
D
or not. If a is
n!(n + 1) included in the k
= objects, then there
k!(n + 1 − k)! are k−1 n
ways to
(n + 1)! complete the
= selection of the k
k!(n + 1 − k)! objects; if a is not
included, then
n+1 there are n
ways.
= 2 k
k
113
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The Binomial Theorem
For any positive integer n,
Xn
n n n−i i
(a + b) = a b.
i=0
i
Part 1
X1
1 1−i i 1 1 0 1 0 1
a b = ab + a b =a+b
PY
i=0
i 0 1
Hence, the formula is true for n = 1.
O
k
(a + b) = ak−i bi .
i=0
i
We want to show that
C k+1
X
k+1 k + 1 k+1−i i
(a + b) = a b.
i=0
i
D
(a + b)k+1 = (a + b)(a + b)k
k
E
X k k−i i
= (a + b) a b
i=0
i
EP
X k X k
k k−i i k k−i i
=a a b +b a b
i=0
i i=0
i
Xk k
k k−i+1 i X k k−i i+1
= a b + a b
D
i=0
i i=0
i
Xk
k k+1 0 k k+1−i i k k 1 k k−1 2
= a b + a b + a b + a b
0 i=1
i 0 1
k k−2 3 k 1 k k 0 k+1
+ a b + ··· + ab + ab
2 k−1 k
X k k
k+1 k k+1−i i X k
=a + a b + ak+1−i bi + bk+1
i=1
i i=1
i−1
k
k + 1 k+1 0 X k k k+1−i i k + 1 0 k+1
= a b + + a b + ab
0 i=1
i i−1 k+1
114
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
k+1
X
k + 1 k+1−i i
= a b
i=0
i
PY
2.4.3. Terms of a Binomial Expansion
O
Solution.
6
(x + y) =
X
6 6 6−k k
x y
C
k=0
k
6 6 0 6 5 1 6 4 2
= xy + xy + xy
D
0 1 2
6 3 3 6 2 4 6 1 5
+ xy + xy + xy
E
3 4 5
6 0 6
+ xy
EP
6
= x6 + 6x5 y + 15x4 y 2 + 20x3 y 3
+ 15x2 y 2 + 6xy 5 + y 6 2
Since the expansion of (a + b)n begins with k = 0 and ends with k = n, the
D
n n n
expansion has n + 1 terms. The first term in the expansion is 0 a = an−1, the
second term is n1 an−1 b = nan=1 b, the second to the last term is n−1 n
ab =
n−1
n n n
nab , and the last term is n b = b .
n
n−k+1 k−1
The kth term of the expansion is k−1 a b . If n is even, there is a
n
middle term, which
is the 2 +1 th term. If n is odd, there are two middle
terms, the n+12
th and n+1
2
+ 1 th terms.
The general term is often represented by nk an−k bk . Notice that, in any term,
the sum of the exponents of a and b is n. The combination nk is the coefficient
of the term involving bk . This allows us to compute any particular term without
needing to expand (a + b)n and without listing all the other terms.
115
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√ 20
Teaching Notes Example 2.4.5. Find the fifth term in the expansion of 2x − y .
To find a specific
term in the
expansion of Solution. The fifth term in the expansion of a fifth power corresponds to k = 4.
(a + b)n , it is
important to find
20 √
the value of k. (2x)20−4 (− y)4 = 4845 65536x16 y 2
4
= 317521920x16 y 2 2
x 6
Example 2.4.6. Find the middle term in the expansion of + 3y .
2
Solution. Since there are seven terms in the expansion, the middle term is the
PY
fourth term (k = 3), which is
3
6 x 3 x 135x3 y 3
3
(3y) = 20 3
27y = . 2
3 2 8 2
O
Example 2.4.7. Find the term involving x (with exponent 1) in the expansion
8
2 2y
of x − .
x
C
Solution. The general term in the expansion is
k
8 2y 8 16−2k (−2)k y k
D
2 8−k
x − = x ·
k x k xk
8
E
= (−2)k x16−2k−k y k
k
8
(−2)k x16−3k y k .
EP
=
k
8
(−2)5 xy 5 = −1792xy 5 . 2
5
Seatwork/Homework 2.4.3
5
1. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand (2a − b2 ) .
Answer:
2 5 5 5 5
2a − b = (2a) + (2a)4 b2
0 1
116
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5 3
2 2 5 3
+ (2a) b + (2a)2 b2
2 3
5 4 5 5
+ (2a) b2 + b2
4 5
= 32a − 80a b + 80a b − 40a2 b6
5 4 2 3 4
+ 10ab8 − b10
11
2 1/3
2. Find the two middle terms in the expansion of x + .
y
Answer: There are 12 terms in the expansion, so the two middle terms are the
PY
6th (corresponding to k = 5) and the 7th (corresponding to k = 6) terms.
5
11
1/3 11−5 2 2 32 14784x2
x = 462x =
5 y y5 y5
O
6
11
1/3 11−6 2 5/3 64 29568x5/3
x = 462x =
6 y C y6 y6
10
x3 3
3. Find the constant term in the expansion of + 2 .
2 x
Answer: The general term is
D
3 10−k k 30−3k k
10 x 3 10 x 3
=
E
k 2 x 2 k 210−k x2k
k
10 3
= x30−5k
EP
k 210−k
6 24 8
117
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
8
X
8 8 8
(0.8) = (1 − 0.2) = (1)8−k (−0.2)k
k=0
k
X8
8
= (−0.2)k
k=0
k
X2
8 k 8 8 8
(1) (−0.2) = + (−0.2) + (−0.2)2
k=0
k 0 1 2
= 1 − 1.6 + 1.12 = 0.52
PY
The calculator value is 0.16777216, so the error is 0.35222784.
X4
8 k 8 8 8
(2) (−0.2) = + (−0.2) + (−0.2)2
k=0
k 0 1 2
O
8 3 8
+ (−0.2) + (−0.2)4
3 4
= 0.52 − 0.448 + 0.112 = 0.184
C
The error is 0.01622784, which is an improvement on the previous estimate.
2
D
Example 2.4.9. Use the Binomial Theorem to prove that, for any positive in-
teger n,
Xn
n
E
= 2n .
k=0
k
EP
118
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
100 100 100 2 100
0= + (−1) + (−1) + (−1)3
0 1 2 3
100 99 100
+ ··· + (−1) + (−1)100
99 100
PY
Therefore, after transposing the negative terms to other side of the equation, we
obtain
100 100 100 100
+ + + ··· +
0 2 4 100
O
100 100 100 100
= + + + ··· + 2
1 3 5 C 99
Seatwork/Homework 2.4.4
? 1. Approximate (1.9)10 using the first three terms in the expansion of
D
(2 − 0.1)10 , and find its error compared to the calculator value.
E
Answer:
2
X
10 10 10
210−k (−0.1)k
EP
(1.9) = (2 − 0.1) ≈
k=0
k
= 2 − 10 · 29 · 0.1 + 45 · 28 · 0.12
10
= 627.2
D
n
X n
X
n n−k k n
n
Answer: 4 = (1 + 3) = n
1 3 = 3k
k=0
k k=0
k
119
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Exercises 2.4
1. Use the Binomial Theorem to expand each expression.
PY
2. Without expanding completely, compute the indicated term(s) in the expan-
sion of the given expression.
15
3 1 15x41 105x37
(a) x + , first 3 terms Answer: x45 + +
2x 2 4
O
(b) (4 − 3x)6 , last 3 terms Answer: 19440x4 − 5832x5 + 729x6
12
3 3247695 4
(c) x +
2
, 9th term
C Answer:
256
x
25
√ 1 53130x10
(d) x− , 6th term Answer: −
D
y y5
18
1 1 12155p9
(e) p+ , middle term Answer:
128q 9
E
2 q
11
2 a2 9856 4 4928 7
(f) + , two middle terms Answer: a + a
EP
a 3 81 243
√ 9
(g) y + x , term involving y 3 Answer: 84x3 y 3
16
1 366080
(h) − 2x , constant term Answer:
x3 729
D
21
(i) (xy − 2y −2 ) , term that does not contain y Answer: −14883840x14
√ 18
x y
(j) − , term in which the exponents of x and y are equal
y2 x
43758
Answer: 6 6
xy
? 3. Approximate (1.1)10 by using the first 4 terms in the expansion of
(1 + 0.1)10 . Compare your answer with the calculator result.
Answer: 2.57, with an error of 0.0237424601 from the calculator value of
2.59374246
120
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Use the Binomial Theorem to prove that
Xn
n k
2 = 3n .
k=0
k
X50
50
(−2)k = 1.
k=0
k
PY
Hint: Expand (1 − 2)50 .
O
C
E D
EP
D
121
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unit 3
Trigonometry
PY
O
C
E D
EP
Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park, by Giovanni G. Navata, 12 November 2010,
D
Named as one of the New Seven Wonders of Nature in 2012 by the New7Wonders
Foundation, the Puerto Princesa Subterranean River National Park is world-
famous for its limestone karst mountain landscape with an underground river.
The Park was also listed as UNESCO World Heritage Site in 1999. The under-
ground river stretches about 8.2 km long, making it one of the world’s longest
rivers of its kind.
122
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 3.1. Angles in a Unit Circle
PY
(3) illustrate angles in standard position and coterminal angles.
Lesson Outline
(1) Linear and angular measure of arcs
(2) Conversion of degree to radian, and vice versa
O
(3) Arc length and area of the sector
(4) Angle in standard position and coterminal angles
C
Introduction
Angles are being used in several fields like engineering, medical imaging, elec-
D
tronics, astronomy, geography and many more. Added to that, surveyors, pilots,
landscapers, designers, soldiers, and people in many other professions heavily use
angles and trigonometry to accomplish a variety of practical tasks. In this les-
E
son, we will deal with the basics of angle measures together with arc length and
sectors.
EP
An angle is formed by rotating a ray about its endpoint. In the figure shown Teaching Notes
D
Angles in
below, the initial side of ∠AOB is OA, while its terminal side is OB. An angle trigonometry differ
is said to be positive if the ray rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the from angles in
Euclidean
angle is negative if it rotates in a clockwise direction. geometry in the
sense of motion.
An angle in
geometry is defined
as a union of rays
(that is, static)
and has measure
between 0◦ and
180◦ . An angle in
trigonometry is a
rotation of a ray,
and, therefore, has
no limit. It has
positive and
negative directions
and measures.
123
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
An angle is in standard position if it is drawn in the xy-plane with its vertex
at the origin and its initial side on the positive x-axis. The angles α, β, and θ in
the following figure are angles in standard position.
PY
O
To measure angles, we use degrees, minutes, seconds, and radians.
C
A central angle of a circle measures one degree, written 1◦ , if it inter-
1
cepts 360 of the circumference of the circle. One minute, written 10 , is
1 1
of 1 , while one second, written 100 , is 60
◦
of 10 .
D
60
E
10 30 18 = 10 30 +
60
◦ 0
= 10 30.3
◦
30.3
= 10 +
60
D
◦
= 10.505
and
Recall that the unit circle is the circle with center at the origin and radius 1
unit.
124
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A central angle of the unit circle that intercepts an arc of the circle
with length 1 unit is said to have a measure of one radian, written 1
rad. See Figure 3.1.
PY
O
C Figure 3.1
Example 3.1.1. In the following figure, identify the terminal side of an angle in
standard position with given measure.
EP
125
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
−→ −−→ −−→ −−→
Solution. (1) 135◦ : OC; −135◦ : OD; −90◦ : OE; and 405◦ : OB
π −−→ −−→ −−→
(2) radian measure: 4
rad: OB; − 3π
4
rad: OD; 3π
2
rad: OE; and − π2 rad:
−−→
OE 2
Since a unit circle has circumference 2π, a central angle that measures 360◦
has measure equivalent to 2π radians. Thus, we obtain the following conversion
rules.
PY
π
1. To convert a degree measure to radian, multiply it by 180
.
180
2. To convert a radian measure to degree, multiply it by π
.
O
Figure 3.2 shows some special angles in standard position with the indicated
terminal sides. The degree and radian measures are also given.
C
E D
EP
D
Figure 3.2
126
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.1.2. Express 75◦ and 240◦ in radians.
Solution. π 5π 5π
75 = =⇒ 75◦ = rad
180 12 12
π 4π 4π
240 = =⇒ 240◦ = rad 2
180 3 3
π 11π
Example 3.1.3. Express 8
rad and 6
rad in degrees.
Solution.
π 180 π
PY
= 22.5 =⇒ rad = 22.5◦
8 π 8
11π 180 11π
= 330 =⇒ rad = 330◦ 2
6 π 6
O
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.1 C
1. Convert the following degree measures to radian measure.
π
(a) 60◦ Answer: 3
rad
D
π
(b) 90◦ Answer: 2 rad
(c) 150◦ Answer: 5π
6
rad
E
π
(a) 9
rad Answer: 20◦
3π
(b) 4
rad Answer: 135◦
Two angles in standard position that have a common terminal side are called
coterminal angles. Observe that the degree measures of coterminal angles differ
by multiples of 360◦ .
Two angles are coterminal if and only if their degree measures differ
by 360k, where k ∈ Z.
Similarly, two angles are coterminal if and only if their radian mea-
sures differ by 2πk, where k ∈ Z.
127
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
As a quick illustration, to find one coterminal angle with an angle that mea-
sures 410◦ , just subtract 360◦ , resulting in 50◦ . See Figure 3.3.
PY
O
Figure 3.3
C
Example 3.1.4. Find the angle coterminal with −380◦ that has measure
Solution. A negative angle moves in a clockwise direction, and the angle −380◦
E
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.2
D
1. Find the angle between 0◦ and 360◦ (if in degrees) or between 0 rad and 2π rad
(if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
(a) 736◦ Answer: 16◦
(b) −28◦ 480 6500 Answer: 331◦ 100 5500
13π π
(c) 2
rad Answer: 2
rad
? (d) 10 rad Answer: 3.72 rad
2. Find the angle between −360◦ and 0◦ (if in degrees) or between −2π rad and
0 rad (if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
128
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) 142◦ Answer: −218◦
(b) −400◦ 10 2300 Answer: −40◦ 10 2300
π
(c) 6
rad Answer: − 11π
6
rad
? (d) −20 rad Answer: −1.15 rad
In a circle, a central angle whose radian measure is θ subtends an arc that is the
θ
fraction 2π of the circumference of the circle. Thus, in a circle of radius r (see Teaching Notes
Review how arcs
Figure 3.4), the length s of an arc that subtends the angle θ is were measured in
PY
Grade 10. What
θ θ unit of measure
s= × circumference of circle = (2πr) = rθ. was used? For two
2π 2π circles with
different radii, do
equal central
angles intercept
O
arcs of the same
measure?
Conclude that
previous notion of
C arc measure is not
the same as length.
Arcs are now
measured in terms
of length and
measure changes
D
with the radius of
the circle.
E
Figure 3.4
EP
s = rθ.
Example 3.1.5. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius 10 m that
subtends a central angle of 30◦ .
Solution. Since the given central angle is in degrees, we have to convert it into
radian measure. Then apply the formula for an arc length.
π π
30 = rad
180 6
π 5π
s = 10 = m 2
6 3
129
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.1.6. A central angle θ in a circle of radius 4 m is subtended by an
arc of length 6 m. Find the measure of θ in radians.
Solution.
s 6 3
θ= = = rad 2
r 4 2
A sector of a circle is the portion of the interior of a circle bounded by the
initial and terminal sides of a central angle and its intercepted arc. It is like a
“slice of pizza.” Note that an angle with measure 2π radians will define a sector
that corresponds to the whole “pizza.” Therefore, if a central angle of a sector
θ
has measure θ radians, then the sector makes up the fraction 2π of a complete
circle. See Figure 3.5. Since the area of a complete circle with radius r is πr2 , we
PY
have
θ 1
Area of a sector = (πr2 ) = θr2 .
2π 2
O
C
E D
Figure 3.5
EP
A = r2 θ.
2
Example 3.1.7. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle 60◦ if
the radius of the circle is 3 m.
Solution. First, we have to convert 60◦ into radians. Then apply the formula for
computing the area of a sector.
π π
60 = rad
180 3
1 π 3π 2
A = (32 ) = m 2
2 3 2
130
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.1.8. A sprinkler on a golf course fairway is set to spray water over
a distance of 70 feet and rotates through an angle of 120◦ . Find the area of the
fairway watered by the sprinkler.
Solution. π 2π
120 = rad
180 3
1 2π 4900π
A = (702 ) = ≈ 5131 ft2 2
2 3 3
Seatwork/Homework 3.1.3
PY
1. In a circle of radius 7 feet, find the length of the arc that subtends a central
angle of 5 radians. Answer: 35 ft
2. A central angle θ in a circle of radius 20 m is subtended by an arc of length
15π m. Find the measure of θ in degrees. Answer: 135◦
O
3. Find the area of a sector of a circle with central angle that measures 75◦ if the
radius of the circle is 6 m. C Answer: 7.5 m2
Exercises 3.1
D
1. Give the degree/radian measure of the following special angles.
E
EP
D
131
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Convert each degree measure to radians. Leave answers in terms of π.
11π
(a) 330◦ Answer: 6
rad
8π
(b) 480◦ Answer: 3 rad
π
(c) 15◦ Answer: 12 rad
(d) 105◦ Answer: 7π
12
rad
53π
(e) 265◦ Answer: 36 rad
(f) −120◦ Answer: − 2π
3
rad
7π
(g) −315◦ Answer: − 4 rad
PY
3. Convert each radian measure to degree-minute-second measure (approximate
if necessary).
5π
(a) rad Answer: 150◦
O
6
8π
(b) 3
rad Answer: 480◦
15π
(c) 4
rad Answer: 675◦
(d) − π6 rad
C Answer: −30◦
(e) − 7π
20
rad Answer: −63◦
? (f) 20 rad Answer: 1145◦ 540 56.1200
D
? (g) −35 rad Answer: −2005◦ 210 8.2200
? (h) −5 rad
E
4. Find the angle between 0◦ and 360◦ (if in degrees) or between 0 rad and 2π rad
EP
5. Find the angle between −360◦ and 0◦ (if in degrees) or between −2π rad and
0 rad (if in radians) that is coterminal with the given angle.
132
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) 685◦ Answer: −35◦
(b) 451◦ Answer: −269◦
(c) −1400◦ Answer: −320◦
(d) 960◦ 450 3400 Answer: −120◦ 450 3400
(e) −728◦ 150 4300 Answer: −8◦ 150 4300
29π
(f) 6
rad Answer: − 7π
6
rad
3π
(g) − 2 rad Answer: − 3π
2
rad
? (h) 16 rad Answer: ≈ −2.850 rad
? (i) −20 rad Answer: ≈ −1.150 rad
PY
6. Find the length of an arc of a circle with radius 21 m that subtends a central
angle of 15◦ . Answer: 7π
4
m
7. A central angle θ in a circle of radius 9 m is subtended by an arc of length 12
m. Find the measure of θ in radians. Answer: 43 rad
O
π
8. Find the radius of a circle in which a central angle of 6
rad determines a sector
of area 64 m2 . Answer: 16 m
C
9. If the radius of a circle is doubled, how is the length of the arc intercepted by
a fixed central angle changed? Answer: The length is doubled.
10. Radian measure simplifies many formulas, such as the formula for arc length,
D
s = rθ. Give the corresponding formula when θ is measured in degrees instead
of radians. Answer: s = πrθ
180
E
? 11. As shown below, find the radius of the pulley if a rotation of 51.6◦ raises the
weight by 11.4 cm. Answer: 12.7 cm
EP
D
? 12. How many inches will the weight rise if the pulley whose radius is 9.27 inches
is rotated through an angle of 71◦ 500 ? Answer: 11.6 in
133
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 13. Continuing with the previous item, through what angle (to the nearest minute)
must the pulley be rotated to raise the weight 6 in? Answer: 37◦ 50
? 14. Given a circle of radius 3 in, find the measure (in radians) of the central angle
of a sector of area 16 in2 . Answer: 3.6 rad
? 15. An automatic lawn sprinkler sprays up to a distance of 20 feet while rotating
30◦ . What is the area of the sector the sprinkler covers? Answer: 104.72 ft2
? 16. A jeepney has a windshield wiper on the driver’s side that has total arm and
blade 10 inches long and rotates back and forth through an angle of 95◦ . The
shaded region in the figure is the portion of the windshield cleaned by the
7-inch wiper blade. What is the area of the region cleaned? Answer: 75.4 in2
PY
O
C
E D
17. If the radius of a circle is doubled and the central angle of a sector is unchanged,
how is the area of the sector changed? Answer: The area is quadrupled.
EP
18. Give the corresponding formula for the area of a sector when the angle is
2θ
measured in degrees. Answer: A = πr
360
? 19. A frequent problem in surveying city lots and rural lands adjacent to curves
of highways and railways is that of finding the area when one or more of the
boundary lines is the arc of a circle. Approximate the total area of the lot
D
134
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
20. Two gears of radii 2.5 cm and 4.8 cm are adjusted so that the smaller gear
drives the larger one, as shown. If the smaller gear rotates counterclockwise
through 225◦ , through how many degrees will the larger gear rotate?
Answer: 117◦
PY
O
4
C
D
Lesson 3.2. Circular Functions
Lesson Outline
(1) Circular functions
(2) Reference angles
Introduction
We define the six trigonometric function in such a way that the domain of Teaching Notes
The teacher can
each function is the set of angles in standard position. The angles are measured give a review of
either in degrees or radians. In this lesson, we will modify these trigonometric trigonometric
ratios as discussed
functions so that the domain will be real numbers rather than set of angles. in Grade 9.
135
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.2.1. Circular Functions on Real Numbers
Recall that the sine and cosine functions (and four others: tangent, cosecant,
secant, and cotangent) of angles measuring between 0◦ and 90◦ were defined in
the last quarter of Grade 9 as ratios of sides of a right triangle. It can be verified
that these definitions are special cases of the following definition.
PY
1
cos θ = x sec θ = , x 6= 0
x
y x
tan θ = , x 6= 0 cot θ = , y 6= 0
x y
O
Example 3.2.1. Find the values of cos 135◦ , tan 135◦ , sin(−60◦ ), and sec(−60◦ ).
C
Solution. Refer to Figure 3.6(a).
E D
EP
D
(a) (b)
Figure 3.6
Teaching Notes From properties of 45◦ -45◦ and 30◦ -60◦ right triangles (with hypotenuse 1
A 45◦ -45◦ right
triangle is isosceles. unit), we obtain the lengths of the legs as in Figure 3.6(b). Thus, the coordinates
Moreover, the of A and B are
opposite side of the
30◦ -angle in a
√ √ ! √ !
30◦ -60◦ right
2 2 1 3
A= − , and B = ,− .
triangle is half the 2 2 2 2
length of its
hypotenuse.
136
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Therefore, we get
√
◦ 2
cos 135 = − , tan 135◦ = −1,
2
√
3
sin(−60◦ ) = − , and sec(−60◦ ) = 2. 2
2
From the last example, we may then also say that
π √2 π √
3
cos rad = , sin − rad = − ,
4 2 3 2
PY
and so on.
From the above definitions, we define the same six functions on real numbers.
These functions are called trigonometric functions.
O
Let s be any real number. Suppose θ is the angle in standard position
with measure s rad. Then we define
sin s = sin θ
C csc s = csc θ
137
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.2.3. Suppose s is a real number such that sin s = − 43 and cos s > 0.
Find cos s.
Solution. We may consider s as the angle with measure s rad. Let P (s) = (x, y)
be the point on the unit circle and on the terminal side of angle s.
Since P (s) is on the unit circle, we know that x2 + y 2 = 1. Since sin s = y =
− 34 ,we get
2 √
2 3 2 7 7
x =1−y =1− − = =⇒ x=± .
4 16 4
√
PY
Since cos s = x > 0, we have cos s = 4
7
. 2
O
C
E D
EP
D
138
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let θ be an angle in standard
p position, Q(x, y) any point on the ter-
minal side of θ, and r = x2 + y 2 > 0. Then
y r
sin θ = csc θ = , y 6= 0
r y
x r
cos θ = sec θ = , x 6= 0
r x
y x
tan θ = , x 6= 0 cot θ = , y 6= 0
x y
We then have a second solution for Example 3.2.3 as follows. With sin s = − 43
PY
and sin s = yr , we may choose y = −3 and r = 4 (which is always positive). In
this case, we can solve for x, which is positive since cos s = x4 is given to be
positive.
√
p √ 7
4 = x2 + (−3)2 =⇒ x = 7 =⇒ cos s =
O
4
Seatwork/Homework 3.2.1
C
1. Given θ, find the exact values of the six circular functions.
(a) θ = 30◦
√ √
D
3 3
Answer: sin 30◦ = 21 , cos 30◦ = , tan 30◦ = , csc 30◦ = 2, sec 30◦ =
√
2 3
√ 2 3
3
, cot 30◦ = 3
E
(b) θ = 3π4 √
2
√
2
√
Answer: sin 3π = , cos 3π
= − , tan 3π = −1, csc 3π = 2, sec 3π =
√ 4 2 4 2 4 4 4
EP
3π
− 2, cot 4 = −1
(c) θ = −150◦
√ √
Answer: sin(−150◦ ) =√ − 12 , cos(−150◦ ) = − 23 , tan(−150◦ ) = 33 , csc(−150◦ ) =
√
−2, sec(−150◦ ) = − 2 3 3 , cot(−150◦ ) = 3
D
(d) θ = − 4π3
4π
√
3 4π 1 4π
√
Answer:
√
sin(− 3
) = 2
, cos(− 3
) =
√
− 2
, tan(− 3
) = − 3, csc(− 4π
3
)=
2 3 4π 4π 3
3
, sec(− 3 ) = −2, cot(− 3 ) = − 3
2. Given a value of one circular function and sign of another function (or the
quadrant where the angle lies), find the value of the indicated function.
√
(a) sin θ = 21 , θ in QI; cos θ Answer: 23
(b) cos θ = 53 , θ in QIV; csc θ Answer: 54
√
3 10
(c) sin θ = − 37 , sec θ < 0; tan θ Answer: 20
√
(d) cot θ = − 29 , cos θ > 0; csc θ Answer: − 985
139
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.2.2. Reference Angle
We observe that if θ1 and θ2 are coterminal angles, the values of the six circular
or trigonometric functions at θ1 agree with the values at θ2 . Therefore, in finding
the value of a circular function at a number θ, we can always
reduce θ to a number
between 0 and 2π. For example, sin 14π 3
= sin 14π
3
− 4π = sin 2π
3
. Also, observe
2π π
from Figure 3.7 that sin 3 = sin 3 .
PY
O
C Figure 3.7
D
In general, if θ1 , θ2 , θ3 , and θ4 are as shown in Figure 3.8 with P (θ1 ) =
(x1 , y1 ), then each of the x-coordinates of P (θ2 ), P (θ3 ), and P (θ4 ) is ±x1 , while
E
the y-coordinate is ±y1 . The correct sign is determined by the location of the
angle. Therefore, together with the correct sign, the value of a particular circular
EP
Figure 3.8
140
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The signs of the coordinates of P (θ) depends on the quadrant or axis where
it terminates. It is important to know the sign of each circular function in each
quadrant. See Figure 3.9. It is not necessary to memorize the table, since the
sign of each function for each quadrant is easily determined from its definition.
We note that the signs of cosecant, secant, and cotangent are the same as sine,
cosine, and tangent, respectively.
PY
Figure 3.9
O
Using the fact that the unit circle is symmetric with respect to the x-axis, the
y-axis, and the origin, we can identify the coordinates of all the points using the
C
coordinates of corresponding points in the Quadrant I, as shown in Figure 3.10
for the special angles.
E D
EP
D
Figure 3.10
141
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.2.4. Use reference angle and appropriate sign to find the exact value
of each expression.
(1) sin 11π
6
and cos 11π
6
(3) sin 150◦
(2) cos − 7π6
(4) tan 8π
3
PY
cos = cos =
6 6 2
(2) The angle − 7π6
lies in Quadrant II wherein cosine is negative, and its refer-
ence angle is π6 .
√
O
7π π 3
cos − = − cos = −
6 6
C 2
1
(3) sin 150◦ = sin 30◦ = 2
√
π
sin
3 √
(4) tan 8π
3
= − tan π
3
= − cos 3π =− 2
1 =− 3 2
3
D
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.2.2
E
Use reference angle and appropriate sign to find the exact value of each expression.
EP
1
(1) sin 510◦ Answer: 2
√
3
(4) cot − 10π
3
Answer: − 3
Exercises 3.2
142
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
(d) cos(−420◦ ) Answer: 2
(e) sin 7π
6
Answer: − 12
(f) cos 5π
3
Answer: 12
(g) tan 3π
4
Answer: −1
(h) sec 2π
3
Answer: −2
11π
(i) csc 6
Answer: −2
35π
√
(j) cot 6
Answer: − 3
(k) cos − 4π
3
Answer: − 12
√
3
(l) tan 17π Answer: −
PY
3 3
√
2
(m) cos 7π
4
Answer: 2
√
(n) sec 19π
4
Answer: − 2
3
√
(o) sin − 4π
3
Answer: 2
O
√
(p) sec 23π
6
Answer: 2 3 3
√
(q) csc 13π Answer: 2 3 3
3
(r) tan 5π
C √
Answer: − 33
6
3. Compute P (θ), and find the exact values of the six circular functions.
19π
(a) θ = 6 √ √ √
Answer: P (θ) = − 23 , − 21 , sin 19π
6
= − 21 , cos 19π
6
=− 2
3
, tan 19π
6
= 3
3
,
√ √
csc 19π
6
= −2, sec 19π
6
= − 2 3 3 , cot 19π
6
= 3
143
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
32π
(b) θ = 3 √ √ √
Answer: P (θ) = − 21 , 23 , sin 32π
3
= 2
3
, cos 32π
3
= − 1
2
, tan 32π
3
= − 3,
√ √
2 3 3
csc 32π
3
= 3
, sec 32π
3
= −2, cot 32π
3
=− 3
4. Given the value of a particular circular function and an information about the
angle θ, find the values of the other circular functions.
1 3π
(a) cos θ = 2
and 2
< θ < 2π
√
3
√ √ √
Answer: sec θ = 2, sin θ = − 2
, tan θ = − 3, csc θ = − 2 3 3 , cot θ = − 33
8
(b) sin θ = 17 and 0 < θ < π2
Answer: csc θ = 17 , cos θ = 15
, tan θ = 8
, sec θ = 17
, cot θ = 15
PY
8 17 15 15 8
√
2 13 3π
(c) cos θ = 13
and 2
< θ < 2π
√ √ √
13
Answer: sec θ = 2
, sin θ = − 3 1313 , tan θ = − 23 , csc θ = − 13
3
, cot θ =
− 23
O
C
Lesson 3.3. Graphs of Circular Functions and Situational
Problems
D
Lesson Outline
(1) Domain and range of circular functions
(2) Graphs of circular functions
(3) Amplitude, period, and phase shift
Introduction
There are many things that occur periodically. Phenomena like rotation of
the planets and comets, high and low tides, and yearly change of the seasons
144
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
follow a periodic pattern. In this lesson, we will graph the six circular functions
and we will see that they are periodic in nature.
Recall that, for a real number x, sin x = sin θ for an angle θ with measure x
radians, and that sin θ is the second coordinate of the point P (θ) on the unit
circle. Since each x corresponds to an angle θ, we can conclude that
(1) sin x is defined for any real number x or the domain of the sine function is
R, and
PY
(2) the range of sine is the set of all real numbers between −1 and 1 (inclusive).
From the definition, it also follows that sin(x+2π) = sin x for any real number
x. This means that the values of the sine function repeat every 2π units. In this
O
case, we say that the sine function is a periodic function with period 2π.
Table 3.11 below shows the values of y = sin x, where x is the equivalent radian
C
measure of the special angles and their multiples from 0 to 2π. As commented
above, these values determine the behavior of the function on R.
π π π π 2π 3π 5π
x 0 π
D
6 4 3 2 3 4 6
√ √ √ √
1 2 3 3 2 1
y 0 2 2 2
1 2 2 2
0
E
7π 5π 4π 3π 5π 7π 11π
x 2π
EP
6 4 3 2 3 4 6
√ √ √ √
2 3 3 2
y − 12 − 2
− 2
−1 − 2
− 2
− 12 0
−0.5 −0.71 −0.87 −1 −0.87 −0.71 −0.5 0
Table 3.11
D
From the table, we can observe that as x increases from 0 to π2 , sin x also
increases from 0 to 1. Similarly, as x increases from 3π
2
to 2π, sin x also increases
from −1 to 0. On the other hand, notice that as x increases from π2 to π, sin x
decreases from 1 to 0. Similarly, as x increases from π to 3π
2
, sin x decreases from
0 to −1.
To sketch the graph of y = sin x, we plot the points presented in Table 3.11,
and join them with a smooth curve. See Figure 3.12. Since the graph repeats
every 2π units, Figure 3.13 shows periodic graph over a longer interval.
145
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes
It is a good
exercise to
construct the
graph of the sine Figure 3.12
function using the
height of P (θ).
Put the unit circle
side-by-side with
PY
the coordinate
plane for the
graph, and trace
the height for each
value of x onto the
graph of y = sin x.
O
Figure 3.13
C
We can make observations about the cosine function that are similar to the
sine function.
D
• y = cos x has domain R and range [−1, 1].
• y = cos x is periodic with period 2π. The graph of y = cos x is shown in
E
Figure 3.14.
EP
D
Figure 3.14
From the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x in Figures 3.13 and 3.14, re-
spectively, we observe that sin(−x) = − sin x and cos(−x) = cos x for any real
number x. In other words, the graphs of y = cos(−x) and y = cos x are the same,
while the graph of y = sin(−x) is the same as that of y = − sin x.
In general, if a function f satisfies the property that f (−x) = f (x) for all x
in its domain, we say that such function is even. On the other hand, we say that
a function f is odd if f (−x) = −f (x) for all x in its domain. For example, the
functions x2 and cos x are even, while the functions x3 − 3x and sin x are odd.
146
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.3.2. Graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx
Using a table of values from 0 to 2π, we can sketch the graph of y = 3 sin x, and
compare it to the graph of y = sin x. See Figure 3.15 wherein the solid curve
belongs to y = 3 sin x, while the dashed curve to y = sin x. For instance, if x = π2 ,
then y = 1 when y = sin x, and y = 3 when y = 3 sin x. The period, x-intercepts,
and domains are the same for both graphs, while they differ in the range. The
range of y = 3 sin x is [−3, 3].
PY
Figure 3.15
O
C
In general, the graphs of y = a sin x and y = a cos x with a > 0 have the same
shape as the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x, respectively. If a < 0, there is
a reflection across the x-axis. The range of both y = a sin x and y = a cos x is Teaching Notes
Review or teach
[−|a|, |a|].
D
the reflection
across the x-axis
when the sign of
In the graphs of y = a sin x and y = a cos x, the number |a| is called the function is
E
its amplitude. It dictates the height of the curve. When |a| < 1, changed.
the graphs are shrunk vertically, and when |a| > 1, the graphs are
stretched vertically.
EP
π π π π 2π 3π 5π
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
π
√ √ √ √
3 3 3 3
y 0 2
1 2
0 − 2
−1 − 2
0
0 0.87 1 0.87 0 −0.87 −1 −0.87 0
7π 5π 4π 3π 5π 7π 11π
x 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
2π
√ √ √ √
3 3 3
y 2
1 2
0 − 2
−1 − 23 0
0.87 1 0.87 0 −0.87 −1 −0.87 0
Table 3.16
147
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.17
PY
Figure 3.17 shows the graphs of y = sin 2x (solid curve) and y = sin x (dashed
curve) over the interval [0, 2π]. Notice that, for sin 2x to generate periodic values
similar to [0, 2π] for y = sin x, we just need values of x from 0 to π. We then
expect the values of sin 2x to repeat every π units thereafter. The period of
O
y = sin 2x is π.
2π
If b 6= 0, then both y = sin bx and y = cos bx have period given by .
C |b|
If 0 < |b| < 1, the graphs are stretched horizontally, and if |b| > 1, the
graphs are shrunk horizontally.
D
To sketch the graphs of y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, a, b 6= 0, we may proceed
E
(1) Determine the amplitude |a|, and find the period 2π . To draw one cycle
EP
|b|
of the graph (that is, one complete graph for one period), we just need to
complete the graph from 0 to 2π
|b|
.
(2) Divide the interval into four equal parts, and get five division points: x1 = 0,
x2 , x3 , x4 , and x5 = 2π
D
|b|
, where x3 is the midpoint between x1 and x5 (that
1
is, 2 (x1 + x5 ) = x3 ), x2 is the midpoint between x1 and x3 , and x4 is the
midpoint between x3 and x5 .
(3) Evaluate the function at each of the five x-values identified in Step 2. The
points will correspond to the highest point, lowest point, and x-intercepts
of the graph.
(4) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve similar
to the graph of the basic sine curve.
(5) Extend the graph to the right and to the left, as needed.
148
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.3.1. Sketch the graph of one cycle of y = 2 sin 4x.
2π
Solution. (1) The period is 4
= π2 , and the amplitude is 2.
(2) Dividing the interval [0, π2 ] into 4 equal parts, we get the following x-
coordinates: 0, π8 , π4 , 3π
8
, and π2 .
(3) When x = 0, π4 , and π2 , we get y = 0. On the other hand, when x = π8 , we
have y = 2 (the amplitude), and y = −2 when x = 3π 8
.
(4) Draw a smooth curve by connecting the points. There is no need to proceed
to Step 5 because the problem only asks for one cycle.
PY
O
C
D
Example 3.3.2. Sketch the graph of y = −3 cos x2 .
E
2π
Solution. (1) The amplitude is | − 3| = 3, and the period is 1 = 4π.
2
EP
(2) We divide the interval [0, 4π] into four equal parts, and we get the following
x-values: 0, π, 2π, 3π, and 4π.
(3) We have y = 0 when x = π and 3π, y = −3 when x = 0 and 4π, and y = 3
when x = 2π.
D
149
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.3.3. Sketch the graph of two cycles of y = 21 sin − 2x
3
.
Solution. Since the sine function is odd, the graph of y = 21 sin − 2x
3
is the same
as that of y = − 12 sin 2x
3
.
2π
(1) The amplitude is 12 , and the period is 2 = 3π.
3
(2) Dividing the interval [0, 3π] into four equal parts, we get the x-coordinates
of the five important points:
0 + 3π 3π 0 + 3π
2 3π 3π
2
+ 3π 9π
= , = , = .
2 2 2 4 2 4
PY
3π
(3) We get y = 0 when x = 0, 2
, and 3π, y = − 21 when 3π
4
, and y = 1
2
when
9π
4
.
(4) We trace the points in Step 3 by a smooth curve.
O
(5) We extend the pattern in Step 4 by one more period to the right.
C
E D
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.2
EP
(2) Sketch the graph of two cycles of y = −2 cos − x2 .
Answer:
150
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) Sketch the graph of y = −2 cos 4x.
Answer:
PY
(4) Sketch the graph of one cycle of y = 3 sin − x3 .
Answer:
O
C
D
3.3.3. Graphs of y = a sin b(x − c) + d and y = a cos b(x − c) + d
E
π
We first compare the graphs of y = sin x and y = sin x − 3
using a table of
values and the 5-step procedure discussed earlier. Teaching Notes
Review or teach
EP
As x runs from π3 to 7π 3
, the value of the expression x− π3 runs from 0 to 2π. So the horizontal
translation rule: if
for one cycle of the graph of y = sin x − π3 , we then expect to have the graph of x is replaced by
y = sin x starting from x = π3 . This is confirmed by the values in Table 3.18. We x − h in the
equation, the
then apply a similar procedure to complete one cycle of the graph; that is, divide graph is translated
the interval [ π3 , 7π ] into four equal parts, and then determine the key values of |h| units to the
D
3
right if h > 0 and
x in sketching the graphs as discussed earlier. The one-cycle graph of y = sin x to the left if h < 0.
(dashed curve) and the corresponding one-cycle graph of y = sin x − π3 (solid
curve) are shown in Figure 3.19.
π 5π 4π 11π 7π
x 3 6 3 6 3
π π 3π
x− 3
0 2
π 2
2π
π
sin x − 3
0 1 0 −1 0
Table 3.18
151
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.19
PY
Observe that the graph of y = sin x − π3 shifts π3 units to the right of
y = sin x. Thus, they have the same period, amplitude, domain, and range.
The graphs of
O
y = a sin b(x − c) and y = a cos b(x − c)
have the same shape as y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, respectively, but
C
shifted c units to the right when c > 0 and shifted |c| units to the left
if c < 0. The number c is called the phase shift of the sine or cosine
graph.
D
Example 3.3.4. In the same Cartesian
plane, sketch one cycle of the graphs of
y = 3 sin x and y = 3 sin x + π4 .
E
Solution. We have sketched the graph of y = 3 sin x earlier at the start of the
EP
π
lesson. We consider y = 3 sin x + 4 . We expect that it has the same shape as
that of y = 3 sin x, but shifted some units.
Here, we have a = 3, b = 1, and c = − π4 . From these constants, we get
the amplitude, the period, and the phase shift, and these are 3, 2π, and − π4 ,
D
respectively.
One cycle starts at x = − π4 and ends at x = − π4 + 2π = 7π
4
. We now compute
the important values of x.
− π4 + 7π
4 3π − π4 + 3π
4 π 3π
4
+ 7π
4 5π
= , = , =
2 4 2 4 2 4
x − π4 π
4
3π
4
5π
4
7π
4
π
y = 3 sin x + 4
0 3 0 −3 0
152
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
While the effect of c in y = a sin b(x − c) and y = a cos b(x − c) is Teaching Notes
Review or teach
a horizontal shift of their graphs from the corresponding graphs of the vertical
y = a sin bx and y = a cos bx, the effect of d in the equations y =
O
translation rule: if
the equation
a sin b(x − c) + d and y = a cos b(x − c) + d is a vertical shift. That is, y = f (x) is
the graph of y = a sin b(x − c) + d has the same amplitude, period, and changed to
y = f (x) + k, the
C
phase shift as that of y = a sin b(x − c), but shifted d units upward
when d > 0 and |d| units downward when d < 0.
graph is translated
|k| units upward if
k > 0 and
downward if k < 0.
Example 3.3.5. Sketch the graph of
D
π
y = −2 cos 2 x − − 3.
6
E
Solution. Here, a = −2, b = 2, c= π6 , and d = −3. We first sketch one cycle of
the graph of y = −2 cos 2 x − π6 , and then extend this graph to the left and to
EP
the right, and then move the resulting graph 3 units downward.
The graph of y = −2 cos 2 x − π6 has amplitude 2, period π, and phase shift
π
6
.
D
π
Start of one cycle: 6
π 7π
End of the cycle: 6
+π = 6
π
6
+ 7π
6 2π π
6
+ 2π
3 5π 2π
3
+ 7π
6 11π
= , = , =
2 3 2 12 2 12
π 5π 2π 11π 7π
x 6 12 3 12 6
y = −2 cos 2 x − π6 −2 0 2 0 −2
y = −2 cos 2 x − π6 − 3 −5 −3 −1 −3 −5
153
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Before we end this sub-lesson, we make the following observation, which will
be used in the discussion on simple harmonic motion (Sub-Lesson 3.3.6).
O
Different Equations, The Same Graph
C
1. The graphs of y = sin x and y = sin(x + 2πk), k any integer, are
the same.
2. The graphs of y = sin x, y = − sin(x + π), y = cos(x − π2 ), and
D
y = − cos(x + π2 ) are the same.
3. In general, the graphs of
E
y = a sin b(x − c) + d,
EP
y = −a sin[b(x − c) + π + 2πk] + d,
π
y = a cos[b(x − c) − 2
+ 2πk] + d,
and
π
y = −a cos[b(x − c) + + 2πk] + d,
D
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.3
154
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer:
PY
1
sketch one cycle of the graphs of y = − 4 sin 2x
(2) In the same Cartesian plane,
O
1 π
and y = 2 − 4 sin 2 x − 4 .
Answer:
C
E D
EP
D
π
(3) Sketch the graph of y = 2 sin 2
− x − 2.
Answer:
155
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.3.4. Graphs of Cosecant and Secant Functions
1
We know that csc x = sin x
if sin x 6= 0. Using this relationship, we can sketch the
graph of y = csc x.
First, we observe that the domain of the cosecant function is
{x ∈ R : sin x 6= 0} = {x ∈ R : x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z}.
Table 3.20 shows the key numbers (that is, numbers where y = sin x crosses the
x-axis, attain its maximum and minimum values) and some neighboring points,
where “und” stands for “undefined,” while Figure 3.21 shows one cycle of the
graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x (solid curve). Notice the
asymptotes of the graph y = csc x.
PY
π π 5π 7π 3π 11π
x 0 6 2 6
π 6 2 6
2π
1 1
y = sin x 0 2
1 2
0 − 12 −1 − 12 0
O
y = csc x und 2 1 2 und −2 −1 −2 und
CTable 3.20
E D
EP
D
Figure 3.21
We could also sketch the graph of csc x directly from the graph of y = sin x
by observing the following facts:
156
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Refer to Figure 3.22 for the graphs of y = sin x (dashed curve) and y = csc x
(solid curve) over a larger interval.
PY
Figure 3.22
O
Like the sine and cosecant functions, the cosine and secant functions are also
reciprocals of each other. Therefore, y = sec x has domain
C kπ
{x ∈ R : cos x 6= 0} = {x ∈ R : x 6= , k odd integer}.
2
Similarly, the graph of y = sec x can be obtained from the graph of y = cos x.
D
These graphs are shown in Figure 3.23.
E
EP
D
Figure 3.23
Solution. First, we sketch the graph of y = 2 sin x2 , and use the technique dis-
cussed above to sketch the graph of y = 2 csc x2 .
157
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The vertical asymptotes of y = 2 csc x2 are the x-intercepts of y = 2 sin x2 :
x = 0, ±2π, ±4π, . . .. After setting up the asymptotes, we now sketch the graph
of y = 2 csc x2 as shown below.
PY
O
C
D
Solution. Sketch the graph of y = − cos 2x (note that it has period π), then sketch
EP
the graph of y = − sec 2x (as illustrated above), and then move the resulting
graph 2 units upward to obtain the graph of y = 2 − sec 2x.
D
158
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.4
O
Answer:
C
E D
EP
(2) Sketch the graph of y = 2 csc 4x − 1 on the interval − π2 , π2 .
Answer:
D
159
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.3.5. Graphs of Tangent and Cotangent Functions
sin x
We know that tan x = cos x
, where cos x 6= 0. From this definition of the tangent
function, it follows that its domain is the same as that of the secant function,
which is
kπ
{x ∈ R : cos x 6= 0} = {x ∈ R : x 6= , k odd integer}.
2
We note that tan x = 0 when sin x = 0 (that is, when x = kπ, k any integer), and
that the graph of y = tan x has asymptotes x = kπ2
, k odd integer. Furthermore,
by recalling the signs of tangent from Quadrant I to Quadrant IV and its values,
we observe that the tangent function is periodic with period π.
PY
To sketch the graph of y = tan x, it will be enough to know its one-cycle
π π
Teaching Notes graph on the open interval − 2 , 2 . See Table 3.24 and Figure 3.25.
There is also a way
of sketching the
graph of y = tan x
x − π2 − π3 − π4 − π6 0
O
based on the
tangent segment to √ √
3
the unit circle, y = tan x und − 3 −1 − 3
0
similar to the
construction
described in
sketching the
x
C π
6
√
π
4
√
π
3
π
2
3
graph of y = sin x. y = tan x 3
1 3 und
But we do not go
anymore into the Table 3.24
D
details of this
approach.
E
EP
D
Figure 3.25
cos x
In the same manner, the domain of y = cot x = sin x
is
and its period is also π. The graph of y = cot x is shown in Figure 3.26.
160
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.26
PY
In general, to sketch the graphs of y = a tan bx and y = a cot bx, a 6= 0 and
b > 0, we may proceed with the following steps:
O
(1) Determine the period πb . Then
π π
we draw one cycle of the graph on − 2b , 2b
π
for y = a tan bx, and on 0, b for y = a cot bx.
C
(2) Determine the two adjacent vertical asymptotes. For y = a tan bx, these
π
vertical asymptotes are given by x = ± 2b . For y = a cot bx, the vertical
asymptotes are given by x = 0 and x = πb .
D
(3) Divide the interval formed by the vertical asymptotes in Step 2 into four
equal parts, and get three division points exclusively between the asymp-
E
totes.
(4) Evaluate the function at each of these x-values identified in Step 3. The
EP
(5) Plot the points found in Step 3, and join them with a smooth curve ap-
proaching to the vertical asymptotes. Extend the graph to the right and to
the left, as needed.
D
Solution. The period of the function is π2 , and the adjacent asymptotes are x =
± π4 , ± 3π
4
, . . .. Dividing the interval − π4 , π4 into four equal parts, the key x-values
are − π8 , 0, and π8 .
x − π8 0 π
8
y = 21 tan 2x − 21 0 1
2
161
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Example 3.3.9. Sketch the graph of y = 2 cot x3 on the interval (0, 3π).
O
Solution. The period of the function is 3π, and the adjacent asymptotes are x = 0
and x = 3π. We now divide the interval (0, 3π) into four equal parts, and the
key x-values are 3π , 3π , and 9π .
4 2 4
C
3π 3π 9π
x 4 2 4
y = 2 cot x3
D
2 0 −2
E
EP
D
162
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.5
PY
O
(2) Sketch the graph of y = 2 tan x4 on the interval [−2π, 2π].
Answer:
C
E D
EP
D
163
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
C
Sundial, by liz west, 29 March 2007,
tance, this oscillatory motion of the weight will continue on and on, and its height
is periodic with respect to time.
EP
D
164
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
t = 6.1 sec t = 9 sec
PY
Periodic motions are usually modeled by either sine or cosine function, and are
called simple harmonic motions. Unimpeded movements of objects like oscilla-
tion, vibration, rotation, and motion due to water waves are real-life occurrences
O
that behave in simple harmonic motion.
C
Equations of Simple Harmonic Motion
The displacement y (directed height or length) of an object behaving
in a simple harmonic motion with respect to time t is given by one of
the following equations:
D
y = a sin b(t − c) + d
E
or
y = a cos b(t − c) + d.
EP
165
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
highest location for the first time. Find the equation of the motion.
Solution. We are given that the weight is located at its lowest position at t = 0;
that is, y = −5 when t = 0. Therefore, the equation is y = −5 cos bt.
Because it took the weight 8 seconds from the lowest point to its immediate
highest point, half the period is 8 seconds.
1 2π π πt
· = 8 =⇒ b = =⇒ y = −5 cos 2
2 b 8 8
? Example 3.3.11. Suppose you ride a Ferris wheel. The lowest point of the
wheel is 3 meters off the ground, and its diameter is 20 m. After it started, the
Ferris wheel revolves at a constant speed, and it takes 32 seconds to bring you
PY
back again to the riding point. After riding for 150 seconds, find your approximate
height above the ground.
Solution. We ignore first the fixed value of 3 m off the ground, and assume that
the central position passes through the center of the wheel and is parallel to the
O
ground.
Let t be the time (in seconds) elapsed that you have been riding the Ferris
C
wheel, and y is he directed distance of your location with respect to the assumed
central position at time t. Because y = −10 when t = 0, the appropriate model
is y = −10 cos bt for t ≥ 0.
D
Given that the Ferris wheel takes 32 seconds to move from the lowest point
to the next, the period is 32.
E
2π π πt
= 32 =⇒ b = =⇒ y = −10 cos
b 16 16
When t = 150, we get y = 10 cos 150π
EP
16
≈ 3.83.
Bringing back the original condition given in the problem that the riding point
is 3 m off the ground, after riding for 150 seconds, you are approximately located
3.83 + 13 = 16.83 m off the ground. 2
D
166
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.3.12. A signal buoy in Laguna Bay bobs up and down with the
height h of its transmitter (in feet) above sea level modeled by h(t) = a sin bt + d
at time t (in seconds). During a small squall, its height varies from 1 ft to 9 ft
above sea level, and it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next. Find
the values of the constants a, b, and d.
• The minimum and maximum values of h(t) are 1 ft and 9 ft, respectively.
Thus, the amplitude is a = 12 (M − m) = 12 (9 − 1) = 4.
• Because it takes 3.5 seconds from one 9-ft height to the next, the period is
PY
3.5. Thus, we have 2πb
= 3.5, which gives b = 4π
7
.
• Because the lowest point is 1 ft above the sea level and the amplitude is 4,
it follows that d = 5. 2
O
Example 3.3.13. A variable star is a star whose brightness fluctuates as ob-
served from Earth. The magnitude of visual brightness of one variable star ranges
from 2.0 to 10.1, and it takes 332 days to observe one maximum brightness to
C
the next. Assuming that the visual brightness of the star can be modeled by the
equation y = a sin b(t − c) + d, t in days, and putting t = 0 at a time when the
star is at its maximum brightness, find the constants a, b, c, and d, where a, b > 0
and c the least nonnegative number possible.
D
Solution.
E
M −m 10.1 − 2.0
a= = = 4.05
2 2
2π π
EP
= 332 =⇒ b =
b 166
d = a + m = 4.05 + 2.0 = 6.05
For the (ordinary) sine function to start at the highest point at t = 0, the least
possible horizontal movement to the right (positive value) is 3π units.
D
3π 3π 3π
bc = =⇒ c= = π = 249 2
2 2b 2 · 166
? Example 3.3.14. The path of a fast-moving particle traces a circle with equa-
tion
(x + 7)2 + (y − 5)2 = 36.
It starts at point (−1, 5), moves clockwise, and passes the point (−7, 11) for the
first time after traveling 6 microseconds. Where is the particle after traveling 15
microseconds?
167
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. As described above, we may choose sine or cosine function. Here, we
choose the sine function to describe both x and y in terms of time t in microsec-
onds; that is, we let
where we appropriately choose the positive values for a, b, e, and f , and the least
nonnegative values for c and g.
The given circle has radius 6 and center (−7, 5). Defining the central position
of the values of x as the line x = −7 and that of the values of y as the line y = 5,
we get a = e = 6, d = −7, and h = 5.
PY
From the point (−1, 5) to the point (−7, 11) (moving clockwise), the particle
has traveled three-fourths of the complete cycle; that is, three-fourths of the
period must be 2.
3 2π 3 2π π
· = · =6 =⇒ b=f =
O
4 b 4 f 4
Teaching Notes As the particle starts at (−1, 5) and moves clockwise, the values of x start
Here, we need an
equation with the
same graph as
C
at its highest value (x = −1) and move downward toward its central position
y = a sin(bt+ π2 )+d
(x = −7) and continue to its lowest value (x = −13). Therefore, the graph of
that will fit in the a sin bt + d has to move 3π
2b
= 6 units to the right, and so we get c = 6.
equation
D
y = a sin b(t−c)+d, As to the value of g, we observe the values of y start at its central position
where c is the least
nonnegative
(y = 5) and go downward to its lowest value (y = −1). Similar to the argument
possible number. used in determining c, the graph of y = e sin f t + h has to move πb = 4 units to
E
Recall the
observation made the right, implying that g = 4.
on page 154.
Hence, We have the following equations of x and y in terms of t:
EP
and √
y = 6 sin π4 (15 − 4) + 5 = 5 + 3 2 ≈ 9.24.
That is, after traveling for 15 microseconds, the particle is located near the point
(−2.76, 9.24). 2
Seatwork/Homework 3.3.6
168
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
position, and then released. After 14 seconds, the weight reaches again to its
highest position. Find the equation of the motion, and locate the weight with
respect to the resting position after 20 seconds since it was released.
Answer: y = 6 cos π7 t or y = 6 sin pi7 (t + 72 ), location of the weight after 20
seconds: about 5.4 cm below the resting position
2. Suppose the lowest point of a Ferris wheel is 1.5 meters off the ground, and its
radius is 15 m. It makes one complete revolution every 30 seconds. Starting at
the lowest point, find a cosine function that gives the height above the ground
of a riding child in terms of the time t in seconds.
π
Answer: y = 15 cos 15 t − 15
2
+ 16.5
PY
Exercises 3.3
1. Sketch two cycles of the graph (starting from x = 0) of the given function.
Indicate the amplitude, period, phase shift, domain, and range for each func-
O
tion.
(a) y = 4 sin x
C
Answer: amplitude = 4, period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [−4, 4]
(b) y = 3 cos x
D
Answer: amplitude = 3, period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [−3, 3]
E
(c) y = cos x4
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 8π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
EP
range = [−1, 1]
(d) y = − sin 2x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [−1, 1]
D
169
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) y = 2 + sin 4x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = π
2
, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [1, 3]
PY
O
(f) y = −1 + cos x
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [−2, 0]
C
(g) y = − 21 sin 3x
Answer: amplitude = 1
, period = 2π
, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
D
2 3
range = [− 12 , 12 ]
(h) y = 3 sin(−x)
E
(i) y = 3 − 2 cos x2
Answer: amplitude = 2, period = 4π, phase shift = 0, domain = R,
range = [1, 5]
D
(j) y = sin x − π4
Answer: amplitude = 1, period = 2π, phase shift = π
4
, domain = R,
range = [−1, 1]
170
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(k) y = 2 cos x + π3
Answer: amplitude = 2, period = 2π, phase shift = − π3 , domain = R,
range = [−2, 2]
(l) y = 3 sin(x − 4π)
Answer: amplitude = 3, period = 2π, phase shift = 4π, domain = R,
range = [−3, 3]
PY
(m) y = 2 − 32 cos x − π2
Answer: amplitude = 2
3
, period = 2π, phase shift = π
2
, domain = R,
O
range = [ 34 , 83 ]
C
E D
EP
(n) y = −4 cos x − π3 + 2
Answer: amplitude = 4, period = 2π, phase shift = π
3
, domain = R,
range = [−2, 6]
2. Sketch the graph of the following functions.
D
(a) y = | sin x|
Answer:
171
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) y = |4 cos x| + 2
Answer:
PY
O
(c) y = |2 sin 2(x + π)| − 1
Answer: C
E D
EP
3. Sketch the graph of each function over two periods, starting from x = 0.
Indicate the period, phase shift, domain, and range of each function.
D
(a) y = csc(−x)
Answer: period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z},
range = (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞)
(b) y = cot(−x)
Answer: period = π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z},
range = R
(c) y = − tan x
Answer: period = π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π2 , k ∈
Z}, range = R
172
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(d) y = − sec x
O
Answer: period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π2 , k ∈
Z}, range = (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞) C
E D
EP
(e) y = − sec 3x
D
Answer: period = 2π
3
, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π6 , k ∈
Z}, range = (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞)
(f) y = 3 csc x
Answer: period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z},
range = (−∞, −3] ∪ [3, ∞)
(g) y = 4 sec 2x
3
Answer: period = 3π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) 3π
4
, k∈
Z}, range = (−∞, −4] ∪ [4, ∞)
(h) y = tan(x + π)
173
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Answer: period = π, phase shift = −π, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π2 , k ∈
Z}, range = R
(i) y = tan x − π2
Answer: period = π, phase shift = π2 , domain = {x|x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z},
range = R
PY
O
C
(j) y = cot x + π4
D
Answer: period = π, phase shift = π4 , domain = {x|x 6= (2k−1) π4 , k even integer},
range = R
E
(k) y = 2 − 3 csc x
Answer: period = 2π, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= kπ, k ∈ Z},
range = (−∞, −1] ∪ [5, ∞)
EP
(l) y = 4 + sec 3x
Answer: period = 2π
3
, phase shift = 0, domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π6 , k ∈
Z}, range = (−∞, 3] ∪ [6, ∞)
(m) y = 2 sec x − π3
D
174
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
(o) y = 3 csc x − 3π
2
3π
Answer: period = 2π, phase shift = , domain = {x|x 6= (2k + 1) π2 , k ∈
O
2
Z}, range = (−∞, −3] ∪ [3, ∞)
C
E D
EP
D
4. Assuming that there is no vertical shift, find a function that describes a simple
harmonic motion with the following properties.
175
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(c) cosine function; lowest point 9 cm below the equilibrium at time t = 0;
period = 5 sec Answer: y = 9 cos 2π
5
(t − 52 )
PY
It starts at point (3, −1), moves counterclockwise, and passes the point (8, 4)
for the first time after traveling 7 microseconds. Where is the particle after
traveling for 20 microseconds? Answer: about the point (−1.87, 5.11)
Hint. The coordinates (x, y) of the location of the particle at time t (in mi-
π π
croseconds) are given by x = 5 cos 14 (t − 7) + 3 and y = 5 sin 14 (t − 7) + 4.
O
7. A wooden ball is tied on a string 30 cm long, and is oscillating like a pendulum.
See figure below. It is initially pulled back at 90◦ angle with the vertical, and
C
is released with a push so that the ball reaches its maximum height back and
forth. If it reaches its maximum height again after 3 seconds, find its height
10 seconds after it was released. Answer: 27 cm
E D
EP
D
Hint. The height h(t) (in cm) of the ball at time t (in seconds) is given by
h(t) = |30 sin π3 (t − 23 )| + 12.
8. For what values of k do y = cot x and y = cot(x − kπ) have the same graph?
Answer: any integer
9. For what values of k do y = sec x and y = sec(x − kπ) have the same graph?
Answer: any even integer
176
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
10. Find the least positive value of c such that the graph of y = −2 sin 2(x + c)
coincide with that of y = 2 cos 2x. Answer: π4
11. Find the largest positive value of c such that the graph of y = 2 cos 3(x − c)
coincide with that of y = −2 cos 3(x − 2). Answer: 2 + π3
12. For what values of a do the graphs of y = a cos b(x−c) and y = −2 sec π6 (x−6)
never intersect for any values of b and c? Answer: −2 < a < 2
PY
Time Frame: 4 one-hour sessions
O
At the end of the lesson, the student is able to:
(1) determine whether an equation is an identity or a conditional equation;
C
(2) derive the fundamental trigonometric identities;
(3) simplify trigonometric expressions using fundamental trigonometric identi-
ties; and
D
(4) prove other trigonometric identities using fundamental trigonometric identi-
ties.
E
Lesson Outline
(1) Domain of an equation
EP
Introduction
In previous lessons, we have defined trigonometric functions using the unit
circle and also investigated the graphs of the six trigonometric functions. This
lesson builds on the understanding of the different trigonometric functions by
discovery, deriving, and working with trigonometric identities.
177
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
What are the real values of the variable x that make the expressions defined in
the set of real numbers?
In the first expression, every real value of x when substituted to the expression
makes it defined in the set of real numbers; that is, the value of the expression is
real when x is real.
In the second expression, not every real value of x makes
√ the expression defined
in R. For example, when x = 0, the expression becomes −1, which is not a real
number.
√
x2 − 1 ∈ R ⇐⇒ x2 − 1 ≥ 0 ⇐⇒ x ≤ −1 or x ≥ 1
√
Here, for x2 − 1 to be defined in R, x must be in (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞).
PY
In the third expression, the values of x that make the denominator zero make
the entire expression undefined.
x2 − 3x − 4 = (x − 4)(x + 1) = 0 ⇐⇒ x = 4 or x = −1
O
x
Hence, the expression is real when x 6= 4 and x 6= −1.
x2
− 3x − 4
√
C
In the fourth expression, because the expression x − 1 is in the denominator,
x must be greater than 1. Although the value of the entire expression is 0 when
x = 0, we do not include 0 as allowed value of x because part of the expression
is not real when x = 0.
D
In the expressions above, the allowed values of the variable x constitute the
domain of the expression.
E
The domain of an expression (or equation) is the set of all real values of
EP
the variable for which every term (or part) of the expression (equation)
is defined in R.
In the expressions above, the domains of the first, second, third, and fourth
expressions are R, (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞), R \ {−1, 4}, and (1, ∞), respectively.
D
178
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. (a) x3 + 2x2 − 8x = x(x + 4)(x − 2) = 0 ⇐⇒ x = 0, x =
−4, or x = 2
√
x + 1 ∈ R ⇐⇒ x + 1 ≥ 0 ⇐⇒ x ≥ −1
1−x=0 ⇐⇒ x=1
Domain = [−1, ∞) \ {−4, 0, 1, 2}
= [−1, 0) ∪ (0, 1) ∪ (1, 2) ∪ (2, ∞)
sin θ
(b) tan θ − sin θ − cos 2θ = cos θ
− sin θ − cos 2θ
kπ
cos θ = 0 ⇐⇒ θ= 2
, k odd integer
Domain = R \ { kπ
2
| k odd integer}
PY
√
(c) The expression 1+x2 is always positive,
√ and so 1 + x2 is defined in R. On
the other hand, the expression x2 − 1 is also defined in R, but it cannot
3
O
Domain = R \ {−1, 1}
(d) 1 + sin z = 0 ⇐⇒ z= 3π
+ 2kπ, k ∈ Z
Domain = R \ { 3π
2
+ 2kπ|k ∈ Z}
C
2
2
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.1
D
Find the domain of the expression/equation.
E
x x+1 2
(1) − 2 − 2 Answer: R \ {−1, 1}
x + 1 x + 2x + 1 x − 1
EP
1 1
(2) 2 sec2 θ = + Answer: R \ (2k + 1) π2 |k ∈ Z
1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ
2
(3) 2 tan x = 2 cot x + 1 Answer: R \ kπ 2
|k ∈ Z
1
(4) √ − tan x = sin x Answer: R \ {−1, 1} ∪ (2k + 1) π2 |k ∈ Z
D
1 − x2
Group A Group B
(A1) x2 − 1 = 0 (B1) x2 − 1 = (x − 1)(x + 1)
(A2) (x + 7)2 = x2 + 49 (B2) (x + 7)2 = x2 + 14x + 49
x2 − 4 x2 − 4
(A3) = 2x − 1 (B3) =x+2
x−2 x−2
179
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In each equation in Group A, some values of the variable that are in the
domain of the equation do not satisfy the equation (that is, do not make the
equation true). On the other hand, in each equation in Group B, every element
in the domain of the equation satisfies the given equation. The equations in
Group A are called conditional equations, while those in Group B are called
identities.
PY
then the equation is a conditional equation.)
O
the domain that does not satisfy the equation.
√ √ √
(1) x3 − 2 = x − 3
2 x2 + 3 2x + 3 4
(2) sin2 θ = cos2 θ + 1
C
(3) sin θ = cos θ − 1
√ √
D
1− x 1−2 x+x
(4) √ =
1+ x 1−x
E
(2) This is a conditional equation. If θ = 0, then the left-hand side of the equation
is 0, while the right-hand side is 2.
(3) This is also a conditional equation. If θ = 0, then both sides of the equation
are equal to 0. But if θ = π, then the left-hand side of the equation is 0,
D
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.2
Identify whether the given equation is an identity or a conditional equation. For
each conditional equation, provide a value of the variable in the domain that does
not satisfy the equation.
x2 1
(1) 1 + x + = Answer: identity
1−x 1−x
180
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos2 θ − sin2 θ
(2) = cos θ − sin θ Answer: identity
cos θ + sin θ
π
(3) tan θ = cot θ Answer: conditional equation, θ = 2
(4) cos2 x = 2 cos x + 3 Answer: conditional equation, x = 0
Recall that if P (x, y) is the terminal point on the unit circle corresponding to θ,
then we have
1 y
sin θ = y csc θ = tan θ =
y x
PY
1 x
cos θ = x sec θ = cot θ = .
x y
From the definitions, the following reciprocal and quotient identities immedi-
ately follow. Note that these identities hold if θ is taken either as a real number
O
or as an angle.
Reciprocal Identities
csc θ =
1
C
sec θ =
1
cot θ =
1
sin θ cos θ tan θ
D
Quotient Identities
E
sin θ cos θ
tan θ = cot θ =
cos θ sin θ
EP
(1) (2)
sin θ cot θ
sin θ
tan θ cos θ cos θ
cos θ
Solution. (1) = =1
sin θ sin θ
cos θ cos θ
(2) = cos θ = sin θ 2
cot θ sin θ
sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1.
181
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Teaching Notes By dividing both sides of this identity by cos2 θ and sin2 θ, respectively, we obtain
The assumption in
the division is that tan2 θ + 1 = sec2 θ and 1 + cot2 θ = csc2 θ.
the divisor is
nonzero.
Pythagorean Identities
sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1
tan2 θ + 1 = sec2 θ 1 + cot2 θ = csc2 θ
PY
1 + cot2 θ
Solution. (1) cos2 θ + cos2 θ tan2 θ = (cos2 θ)(1 + tan2 θ)
= cos2 θ sec2 θ = 1
1
1 + tan2 θ sec2 θ sin2 θ
O
cos2 θ
(2) = = 1 = = tan2 θ 2
1 + cot2 θ csc2 θ sin2 θ
2
cos θ
C
In addition to the eight identities presented above, we also have the following
identities.
Even-Odd Identities
D
sin(−θ) = − sin θ cos(−θ) = cos θ
E
tan(−θ) = − tan θ
EP
The first two of the negative identities can be obtained from the graphs of
the sine and cosine functions, respectively. (Please review the discussion on page
Teaching Notes 146.) The third identity can be derived as follows:
The corresponding
reciprocal sin(−θ) − sin θ
functions follow tan(−θ) = = = − tan θ.
D
Solution. Using the identity sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1 with cos θ > 0, we have
s 2 √
p 3 7
2
cos θ = 1 − sin θ = 1 − − = . 2
4 4
182
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.4.6. If sec θ = 25 and tan θ < 0, use the identities to find the values
of the remaining trigonometric functions of θ.
1 2
cos θ = =
sec θ 5
s 2 √
√ 2 21
sin θ = − 1 − cos2 θ = − 1− =−
5 5
√
1 5 21
PY
csc θ = =−
sin θ 21
√ √
sin θ − 521 21
tan θ = = 2 =−
cos θ 5
2
√
O
1 2 21
cot θ = =− 2
tan θ 21 C
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.3
1. Use the identities presented in this lesson to simplify each trigonometric ex-
D
pression.
1 + tan x
E
1 + cot x 1 + tan1 x
sin θ 1 + cos θ
(b) + Answer: 2 csc θ
1 + cos θ sin θ
sin θ 1 + cos θ sin2 θ (1 + cos θ)(1 + cos θ)
Solution. + = +
D
183
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cos2 θ
(d) 1 − Answer: sin θ
1 + sin θ
cos2 θ 1 + sin θ − cos2 θ
Solution. 1 − =
1 + sin θ 1 + sin θ
2
sin θ + sin θ sin θ(1 + sin θ)
= = = sin θ
1 + sin θ 1 + sin θ
2. Given some initial values, use the identities to find the values of the remaining
trigonometric functions of θ.
2
(a) sin θ = 5
and sec θ > 0
p √ √
Answer: √θ in QI; csc√θ = 52 , cos θ = 1 − sin2 θ = 21
5
, sec θ = 5 21
21
,
PY
tan θ = 2 2121 , cot θ = 221
(b) sec θ = − 38 and tan θ > 0
−3
√ √
Answer: θ in QIII; cos θ = , sin θ = − 1 − cos2 θ = − 7 , csc θ =
√ √ √ 8 4
−4 7 2 7 3 7
, tan θ = , cot θ =
O
7 3 14
(c) tan θ = 2 and csc θ < 0
√ √ √
Answer: θ√in QIII; cot θ = 12 , sec θ = − 5, cos θ = − 55 , csc θ = − 45 ,
sin θ = − 4 5 5
C
3
(d) csc θ = 2
and sec θ < 0
p √ √
in QII; sin θ =√ 23 , cos θ = − 1 − sin2 θ = − 35 , sec θ = − 3 5 5 ,
D
Answer: θ √
tan θ = − 2 5 5 , cot θ = − 25
E
To verify that it is an identity, recall that we need to establish the truth of the
equation for all values of the variable in the domain of the equation. It is not
enough to verify its truth for some selected values of the variable. To prove it, we
use the fundamental trigonometric identities and valid algebraic manipulations
like performing the fundamental operations, factoring, canceling, and multiplying
the numerator and denominator by the same quantity.
Start on the expression on one side of the proposed identity (preferably the
complicated side), use and apply some of the fundamental trigonometric identities
and algebraic manipulations, and arrive at the expression on the other side of the
proposed identity.
184
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Expression Explanation
csc θ − cot θ Start on one side.
1 cos θ
= − Apply some reciprocal and
sin θ sin θ
quotient identities.
1 − cos θ
= Add the quotients.
sin θ
1 − cos θ 1 + cos θ
= · Multiply the numerator
sin θ 1 + cos θ
and denominator by
1 + cos θ.
1 − cos2 θ
PY
= Multiply.
(sin θ)(1 + cos θ)
sin2 θ
= Apply a Pythagorean
(sin θ)(1 + cos θ)
identity.
sin θ
= Reduce to lowest terms.
O
1 + cos θ
Upon arriving at the expression of the other side, the identity has been estab-
C
lished. There is no unique technique to prove all identities, but familiarity with
the different techniques may help.
Solution.
E
1
sec x − cos x = − cos x
cos x
EP
1 − cos2 x
=
cos x
sin2 x sin x
= = sin x · = sin x tan x 2
cos x cos x
D
1 + sin θ 1 − sin θ
Example 3.4.8. Prove: − = 4 sin θ sec2 θ
1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ
Solution.
1 + sin θ 1 − sin θ (1 + sin θ)2 − (1 − sin θ)2
− =
1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ (1 − sin θ)(1 + sin θ)
1 + 2 sin θ + sin2 θ − 1 + 2 sin θ − sin2 θ
=
1 − sin2 θ
4 sin θ
= = 4 sin θ sec2 θ 2
cos2 θ
185
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.4.4
Prove each identity.
PY
Answer: = 1 sin θ
sec θ − tan θ cos θ
− cos θ
cos θ
=
1 − sin θ
cos θ 1 + sin θ
= ·
O
1 − sin θ 1 + sin θ
(cos θ)(1 + sin θ)
=
1 − sin2 θ
=
(cos θ)(1 + sin θ)
C
cos2 θ
1 + sin θ 1 sin θ
= = + = sec θ + tan θ
D
cos θ cos θ cos θ
sec y + tan y
3. = tan y
csc y + 1
E
1 sin y 1+sin y
sec y + tan y cos y
+ cos y cos y sin y
Answer: = 1 = 1+sin y
= = tan y
csc y + 1 + 1 cos y
EP
sin y sin y
1 1
4. 2 csc2 θ = +
1 − cos θ 1 + cos θ
1 1 1 + cos θ + 1 − cos θ 2
Answer: + = = = 2 csc2 θ
1 − cos θ 1 + cos θ 2
1 − cos θ sin2 θ
D
Exercises 3.4
186
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Simplify each expression using the fundamental identities.
sin2 θ
(a) Answer: cos2 θ
sec2 θ − 1
sin2 θ sin2 θ sin2 θ
Solution. = = = cos2 θ
sec2 θ − 1 tan2 θ sin2 θ
cos2 θ
1 1
(b) + Answer: 1
1 + tan x 1 + cot2 x
2
1 1 1 1
Solution. 2
+ 2
= +
1 + tan x 1 + cot x sec x csc2 x
2
= cos2 x + sin2 x = 1
PY
cos2 x
(c) 1 − Answer: − sin x
1 + sin x
cos2 x 1 − sin2 x
Solution. 1 − =1−
1 + sin x 1 + sin x
O
(1 − sin x)(1 + sin x)
=1− C 1 + sin x
= 1 − 1 − sin x = − sin x
sin θ
(d) Answer: 1
cos θ tan θ
sin θ 1
D
Solution. = tan θ · =1
cos θ tan θ tan θ
3. Given some initial information, use the identities to find the values of the
E
trigonometric functions of θ.
5
EP
(a) csc θ = 3
and tan θ > 0
p
Answer: θ in QI; sin θ = 35 , cos θ = 1 − sin2 θ = 45 , sec θ = 54 , tan θ = 34 ,
cot θ = 43
(b) tan θ = − 12
5
and cos θ < 0
√
D
5
Answer: θ in QII; cot θ = − 12 , sec θ = − tan2 θ + 1 = − 13 5
, cos θ = − 13 ,
√ 12 13
5
2
sin θ = 1 − cos θ = 13 , csc θ = 12
(c) csc θ = − 32 and π < x < 3π
2
p √
2 2 5
Answer:
√
θ in QIII;
√
sin θ = −
√ 3
, cos θ = − 1 − sin θ = − 3
, sec θ =
3 5 2 5 5
− 5 , tan θ = 5 , cot θ = 2
(d) cot θ = − 57 and 3π
2
< θ < 2π
5
√ √
74
√
7 74
Answer: θ in QIV; tan θ = − , sec θ = tan2 θ + 1 = , cos θ = ,
√ √ 7 √ 7 74
csc θ = − cot2 θ + 1 = − 574 , sin θ = − 5 7474
187
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) sin θ = −1
3π
Answer: θ coterminal with 2
; csc θ = −1, cos θ = 0, sec θ undefined,
tan θ undefined, cot θ = 0
(f) cot θ = −1
Answer: θ either in QII or QIV√ √ √ √
θ in QII: tan θ = −1, sin θ = 22 , csc θ = 2, cos θ = − 22 , sec θ = − 2
√ √ √ √
θ in QIV: tan θ = −1, sin θ = − 22 , csc θ = − 2, cos θ = 22 , sec θ = 2
PY
(a) sin x cos x = 1 Answer: conditional equation, x = 0
O
(c) (sin x − cos x)2 + (sin x + cos x)2 = 2 Answer: identity
Proof. (sin x − cos x)2 + (sin x + cos x)2
C
= (cos2 x − 2 cos x sin x + sin2 x) + (cos2 x + 2 cos x sin x + sin2 x)
=1+1=2
π
(d) tan(−x) cot x = −1 Answer: conditional equation, x =
D
2
188
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1 + sin u + cos u 1 + cos u
(d) =
1 + sin u − cos u sin u
Solution
1 + sin u + cos u 1 + sin u + cos u 1 + cos u
= ·
1 + sin u − cos u sin u + 1 − cos u 1 + cos u
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u) Teaching Notes
=
sin u + sin u cos u + 1 − cos2 u Since you need
1 + cos u to retain
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u) in the numerator
=
sin u + sin u cos u + sin2 u at the end, do not
expand the
(1 + sin u + cos u)(1 + cos u) numerator.
=
(sin u)(1 + cos u + sin u)
PY
1 + cos u
=
sin u
1 − sec2 x
6. Express in terms of sin x. Answer: − sin2 x
O
sec2 x
1 − sec2 x 1
Solution. 2
= − 1 = cos2 x − 1 = − sin2 x
sec x sec2 x
C √
± 1 − cos2 x
7. Express tan x sec x in terms of cos x. Answer:
cos2 x
√
D
sin x 1 sin x ± 1 − cos2 x
Solution. tan x sec x = cos x
· cos x
= cos2 x
=
cos2 x
E
tan x 1 1
Answer: sin x = √ 2 ; cos x = √ ; cot x = ; sec x =
± tan √ x+1 2
± tan x + 1 tan x
√ ± tan2 x + 1
± tan2 x + 1; csc x =
tan x
D
1
9. If sec θ − tan θ = 3, what is sec θ + tan θ? Answer: 3
Solution. tan2 θ + 1 = sec2 θ =⇒ sec2 θ − tan2 θ = 1
1
(sec θ−tan θ)(sec θ+tan θ) = 1 =⇒ 3(sec θ+tan θ) = 1 =⇒ sec θ+tan θ =
3
189
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 3.5. Sum and Difference Identities
PY
ties and sum and difference identities; and
(4) solve situational problems involving trigonometric identities.
Lesson Outline
O
(1) The sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions
(2) Cofunction identities C
(3) More trigonometric identities
Introduction
In previous lesson, we introduced the concept of trigonometric identity, pre-
D
sented the fundamental identities, and proved some identities. In this lesson, we
derive the sum and difference identities for cosine, sine, and tangent functions,
E
Let u and v be any real numbers with 0 < v ≤ u < 2π. Consider the unit circle
with points A = (1, 0), P1 , P2 , P3 , and u and v with corresponding angles shown
in Figure 3.27. Then P1 P2 = AP3 .
D
Recall that P1 = P (u) = (cos u, sin u), P2 = P (v) = (cos v, sin v), and P3 =
P (u − v) = (cos(u − v), sin(u − v)), so that
p
P1 P2 = (cos u − cos v)2 + (sin u − sin v)2 ,
while p
AP3 = [cos(u − v) − 1]2 + [sin(u − v) − 0]2 .
Equating these two expressions and expanding the squares, we get
190
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Figure 3.27
O
C
cos2 u − 2 cos u cos v + cos2 v + sin2 u − 2 sin u sin v + sin2 v
= cos2 (u − v) − 2 cos(u − v) + 1 + sin2 (u − v)
Applying the Pythagorean identity cos2 θ+sin2 θ = 1 and simplifying the resulting
D
equations, we obtain
E
Although we assumed at the start that 0 < v ≤ u < 2π, but because
cos(−θ) = cos θ (one of the even-odd identities), this new identity is true for
any real numbers u and v. As before, the variables can take any real values or
angle measures.
191
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cosine Sum Identity
π
Example 3.5.1. Find the exact values of cos 105◦ and cos 12 .
Solution.
PY
= · − ·
2√ 2 √ 2 2
2− 6
=
4
O
π π π
cos = cos −
12 4 6
Cπ π
= cos cos + sin sin
π π
√ 4√ 6 √ 4 6
2 3 2 1
= · + ·
√2 2 2 2
D
√
6+ 2
= 2
4
E
3 12
Example 3.5.2. Given cos α = 5
and sin β = 13
, where α lies in QIV and β in
QI, find cos(α + β).
EP
5 5
s 2
q
2 12 5
cos β = 1 − sin β = 1− =
13 13
192
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.5.1
√ √
7π 2− 6
1. Find the exact value of cos . Answer:
12 4
7π π π π π π π
Solution. cos = cos + = cos cos − sin sin
12 4 3 √ 4 3√ √ 4 √3 √
2 1 2 3 2− 6
= · − · =
2 2 2 2 4
2. Express
cos(5x) cos(2x) + sin(5x) sin(2x)
as a single cosine expression. Answer: cos(3x)
PY
Solution. cos(5x) cos(2x) + sin(5x) sin(2x) = cos(5x − 2x) = cos(3x)
1 1
3. Given cos α = and cos β = − , where α lies in QI and β in QIII, find
3 4 √
−1 − 2 30
cos(α − β). Answer:
O
12
√
1 2 2
Solution. cos α = and α in QI =⇒ sin α =
1
3
C
√
15
3
3 4 3 4 12
EP
3.5.2. The Cofunction Identities and the Sine Sum and Difference
Identities
193
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
As for the tangent function, we have
π
sin π2 − B
tan −B =
2 cos π2 − B
cos B
=
sin B
= cot B.
Cofunction Identities
PY
Teaching Notes
The Cofunction
π π
Identities for the cos − B = sin B sin − B = cos B
reciprocal 2 2
functions will π
follow: tan − B = cot B
csc π2 − B =
2
O
sec
B
sec π2 − B =
csc
B
cot π2 − B = Using the first two cofunction identities, we now derive the identity for sin(A+
tan B.
B).
C
hπ i
sin(A + B) = cos − (A + B)
h2 π i
D
= cos − A − B)
π2 π
= cos − A cos B + sin − A sin B
E
2 2
= sin A cos B + cos A sin B
EP
In the last identity, replacing B with −B and applying the even-odd identities
yield
194
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Sine Difference Identity
5π
Example 3.5.3. Find the exact value of sin 12
.
Solution.
π
5π π
sin = sin +
12 4 6
π π π π
= sin cos + cos sin
√ 4√ √6 4 6
PY
2 3 2 1
= · + ·
√2 2
√ 2 2
6+ 2
= 2
4
O
3
Example 3.5.4. If sin α = 13 and sin β = 21 , where 0 < α < π
2
and π
2
< β < π,
find sin(α + β) and sin(β − α).
C
Solution. We first compute cos α and cos β.
s 2 √
p 3 4 10
D
2
cos α = 1 − sin α = 1 − =
13 13
s
E
q 2 √
1 3
cos β = − 1 − sin2 β = − 1 − =−
2 2
EP
√ √
4 10 − 3 3
=
26
195
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.5.5. Prove:
Solution.
PY
= sin(x + y) 2
Seatwork/Homework 3.5.2
π √ √
O
6− 2
1. Find the exact value of sin . Answer:
12 4
π π π π π
C π π
Solution. sin = sin − = sin cos − cos sin
12 4 6 √ 4√ 6 √ 4 6
2 3 2 1
= · − ·
√2 2
√ 2 2
D
6− 2
=
4
√
3
E
2. Find the exact value of sin 20◦ cos 80◦ − sin 80◦ cos 20◦ . Answer: −
2
Solution. sin 20◦ cos 80◦ − sin 80◦ cos 20◦ = sin(20◦ − 80◦ )
EP
√
3
= sin(−60◦ ) = − sin 60◦ = −
2
sin(x + y) tan x + tan y
3. Prove: = .
sin(x − y) tan x − tan y
D
196
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.5.3. The Tangent Sum and Difference Identities
Recall that tan x is the ratio of sin x over cos x. When we replace x with A + B,
we obtain
sin(A + B)
tan(A + B) = .
cos(A + B)
Using the sum identities for sine and cosine, and then dividing the numerator
and denominator by cos A cos B, we have
sin A cos B + cos A sin B
tan(A + B) =
cos A cos B − sin A sin B
sin A cos B cos A sin B
+ cos
PY
cos A cos B A cos B
= cos A cos B sin A sin B
cos A cos B
− cos A cos B
tan A + tan B
= .
1 − tan A tan B
We have just established the tangent sum identity.
O
In the above identity, if we replace B with −B and use the even-odd identity
tan(−θ) = − tan θ, we get
C
tan(A − B) = tan[A + (−B)]
tan A + tan(−B)
=
D
1 − tan A tan(−B)
tan A − tan B
= .
1 + tan A tan B
E
tan(A − B) =
1 + tan A tan B
Seatwork/Homework 3.5.3
5π
π
1. Find the exact values of tan 12
, tan 12
, and tan − 7π
12
.
√ √ √
Answer: 2 + 3, 2 − 3, 2 + 3
197
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√
5π π π tan π4 + tan π6 1 + 33 √
Solution. tan = tan + = = √ = 2+ 3
12 4 6 1 − tan π4 tan π6 1 − 33
√
π π π tan π4 − tan π6 1 − 33 √
tan = tan − = π π =
√ = 2− 3
12 4 6 1 + tan 4 tan 6 1 + 33
7π 5π √
tan − = tan =2+ 3
12 12
π
2. Express tan 4 + θ and tan(2π − θ) in terms of tan θ.
π tan π4 + tan θ 1 + tan θ
Solution. tan +θ = π =
4 1 − tan 4 tan θ 1 − tan θ
tan 2π − tan θ
PY
tan(2π − θ) = = − tan θ
1 + tan 2π tan θ
cot A cot B − 1
3. Prove: cot(A + B) = .
cot A + cot B
1 1 − tan A tan B
O
Solution. cot(A + B) = =
tan(A + B) tan A + tan B
1 − tan A tan B cot A cot B
= ·
C
tan A + tan B cot A cot B
cot A cot B − 1
=
cot A + cot B
D
Exercises 3.5
√
√
2− 6
(a) cos 255◦ Answer:
EP
4 √
π
(b) tan 12 Answer: 2 − 3
√ √
6− 2
(c) sin 735◦ Answer:
4 √
(d) cot 285◦ Answer: −2 + 3
D
1
(e) cos π9 cos 2π
9
− sin π
9
sin 2π
9
Answer:
2
tan 20◦ + tan 25◦
(f) Answer: 1
1 − tan 20◦ tan 25◦
2. Given some information about a and b, find sin(a+b), cos(a−b), and tan(a+b).
(a) sin a = − 35 , cos b = 12
13
, a lies in the third quadrant, and b in the first
quadrant
56 63 56
Answer: sin(a + b) = − ; cos(a − b) = − ; tan(a + b) =
65 65 33
Solution. cos a = − 45 , sin b = 13
5
198
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) cos a = 21 , tan b = − 32 , 0 < a < π2 , and π2 < b < π
√ √ √ √
3 13 − 2 39 3 39 − 2 13
Answer: sin(a + b) = ; cos(a − b) = ; tan(a +
√ 26 26
24 − 13 3
b) =
23 √ √ √
Solution. sin a = 23 , cos b = − 2 1313 , sin b = 3 1313
(c) sec a = − 25 , cot b = 53 , a in QII, and b in QIII
√ √ √ √
10 34 − 3 714 6 34 − 5 714
Answer: sin(a + b) = ; cos(a − b) = ;
√ 170 170
−375 + 68 28
tan(a + b) =
489
PY
√ √ √
Solution. cos a = − 52 , sin a = 521 , cos b = − 3 3434 , sin b = − 5 3434
O
(b) tan(x + π) Answer: tan x
3π
(c) sin 2
+x Answer: − cos x
(d) cos(x − π)
C Answer: − cos x
cos x sin y
Solution. (cot x + tan y) sin x cos y = + sin x cos y
sin x cos y
= cos x cos y + sin x sin y = cos(x − y)
csc x csc y
(c) sec(x + y) =
cot x cot y − 1
Solution.
1 1
sec(x + y) = =
cos(x + y) cos x cos y − sin x sin y
1
1 sin x sin y
= · 1
cos x cos y − sin x sin y sin x sin y
199
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
sin x sin y
= cos x cos y−sin x sin y
sin x sin y
csc x csc y
=
cot x cot y − 1
PY
cos x cos y
cos x cos y−sin x sin y
cos x cos y
= cos x cos y+sin x sin y
cos x cos y
1 − tan x tan y
=
O
1 + tan x tan y
5. Let n be an integer. Prove that cos(nπ + θ) = (−1)n cos θ and sin(nπ + θ) =
(−1)n sin θ.
C
Solution. cos(nπ) = (−1)n and sin(nπ) = 0 for any integer n.
cos(nπ + θ) = cos(nπ) cos θ − sin(nπ) sin θ = (−1)n cos θ
D
sin(nπ + θ) = sin(nπ) cos θ + cos(nπ) sin θ = (−1)n sin θ
6. In an alternating current circuit, the instantaneous power P (t) at time t is
E
given by
where Im and Vm are the maximum current (in amperes) and voltage (in volts),
respectively. Express this function as a product of two sine functions.
Solution. P (t) = Im Vm sin(ωt)[cos ϕ sin(ωt) − sin ϕ cos(ωt)]
D
200
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
0.6W sin(θ + 90◦ 0.6W cos θ
(a) F (θ) = =
sin 12◦ sin 12◦
◦
0.6(154.32) cos 40
(b) F = ≈ 340.46 lbs
sin 12◦
F sin 12◦ 275 sin 12◦
(c) W = = ≈ 121.17 lbs
0.6 cos θ 0.6 cos 38◦
8. (a) Prove: sin x + sin y = 2 sin x+y 2
cos x−y
2
.
(b) A particle is moving according to the equation of motion
π π
PY
s(t) = sin 4t + + sin 4t + ,
3 6
where s(t) centimeters is the directed distance of the particle from the
origin at t seconds.
(i) Express s(t) in the form s(t) = a sin(bt + c).
O
(ii) Find the amplitude and frequency of the motion. (Here, frequency is
defined as the reciprocal of the period.)
C
Solution
(a) Adding the identities
D
sin(A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B
sin(A − B) = sin A cos B − cos A sin B,
E
we get
sin(A + B) + sin(A − B) = 2 sin A cos B.
EP
x+y x−y
Let A = 2
and B = Then A + B = x and A − B = y. Thus, we
2
.
have
x+y x−y
sin x + sin y = 2 sin cos .
2 2
π π
D
PY
O
C
D
http://cnx.org/contents/XGjYtByD@4/Lab-6-Analog-to-Digital-Conver
E
(a) Write the equation of the sound created by touching the * (asterisk) key
as a product of sine and cosine functions.
EP
202
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
(a) Adding the identities
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B − sin A sin B
cos(A − B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B,
we get
cos(A + B) + cos(A − B) = 2 cos A cos B.
x+y x−y
Let A = 2
and B = 2
Then A + B = x and A − B = y. Thus, we
.
have
x+y x−y
cos x + cos y = 2 cos cos .
2 2
PY
(b) P (t) = F (t) + G(t)
3π
= 0.04 cos(2πt) + 0.04 cos 2πt −
4
3π 3π
O
2πt + 2πt − 4 2πt − 2πt + 4
= 0.04 · 2 cos cos
2 2
3π 3π
= 0.08 cos 2πt −
8
cos
C 8
q
√ 3π
= 0.04 2 − 2 cos 2πt −
8
D
11. (a) In the figure, two intersecting lines have equations y = m1 x + b1 and
y = m2 x + b2 , respectively. Let θ be the acute angle between them, as
E
(b) Two non-vertical lines intersect at the point (−3, 2), and one angle be-
tween them measures 30◦ . If one line is 2y = x + 7, find the equation of
the other line.
203
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution
(a) Let α and β be the angles between each line and the (positive side) x-axis,
as shown in the following diagram:
PY
Then m1 = tan α and m2 = tan β, so that
tan β − tan α m2 − m1
tan θ = tan(β − α) = = .
1 + tan α tan β 1 + m1 m2
O
(b) Solve for m2 in the equation C m2 − 12
tan 30◦ = ,
1 + 21 m2
and then use the point-slope form of the equation of the line to get
D
√
5 3+8
y= (x + 3) + 2.
E
11
12. The length s(θ) of the shadow cast by a vertical pole when the angle of the
EP
204
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) Express s(θ) as a single trigonometric expression.
(b) At what angle θ will give the shortest shadow of the pole? Longest
shadow?
Answer: (a) s(θ) = h cot θ; (b) Shortest shadow occurs at θ = 90◦ . But the
length of the shadow increases when the value of θ approaches 0◦ ; that is, no
maximum length for the shadow.
13. In 4ABC, prove that
PY
Solution
O
tan A + tan(B + C)
= 0 =⇒ tan A + tan(B + C) = 0
1 − tan A tan(B + C)
tan B + tan C
tan A +
C
1 − tan B tan C
=0
tan A − tan A tan B tan C + tan B + tan C
=0
1 − tan B tan C
D
=⇒ tan A − tan A tan B tan C + tan B + tan C = 0
tan A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C
E
4
EP
205
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson Outline
(1) The double-angle and half-angle identities for cosine, sine, and tangent
(2) More trigonometric identities
Introduction
Trigonometric identities simplify the computations of trigonometric expres-
sions. In this lesson, we continue on establishing more trigonometric
identities.
In particular, we derive the formulas for f (2θ) and f 12 θ , where f is the sine,
cosine, or tangent function.
PY
3.6.1. Double-Angle Identities
O
cos(A + B) = cos A cos B − sin A sin B
The double-identity for cosine has other forms. We use the Pythagorean
identity sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1.
D
206
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Other Double-Angle Identities for Cosine
3 π
Example 3.6.1. Given sin t = 5
and 2
< t < π, find sin 2t and cos 2t.
Solution. We first find cos t using the Pythagorean identity. Since t lies in QII,
we have s
p 2
2 3 4
cos t = − 1 − sin t = − 1 − =− .
5 5
PY
sin 2t = 2 sin t cos t cos 2t = 1 − 2 sin2 t
2
3 4 3
=2 − =1−2
5 5 5
24 7
O
=− = 2
25 25
In the last example, we may compute cos 2t using one of the other two double-
C
angle identities for cosine. For the sake of answering the curious minds, we include
the computations here.
D
cos 2t = cos2 t − sin2 t cos 2t = 2 cos2 t − 1
2 2 2
4 3 4
E
= − − =2 − −1
5 5 5
7 7
= =
EP
25 25
Solution. We use the sum identity for sine, the double-angle identities for sine
and cosine, and the Pythagorean identity.
sin 3x = sin(2x + x)
= sin 2x cos x + cos 2x sin x
= (2 sin x cos x) cos x + (1 − 2 sin2 x) sin x
= 2 sin x cos2 x + sin x − 2 sin3 x
= 2(sin x)(1 − sin2 x) + sin x − 2 sin3 x
= 3 sin x − 4 sin3 x 2
207
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
For the double-angle formula for tangent, we recall the tangent sum identity:
tan A + tan B
tan(A + B) = .
1 − tan A tan B
When A = B, we obtain
tan A + tan A 2 tan A
tan(A + A) = = .
1 − tan A tan A 1 − tan2 A
PY
tan 2A =
1 − tan2 A
Example 3.6.3. If tan θ = − 13 and sec θ > 0, find sin 2θ, cos 2θ, and tan 2θ.
O
Solution. We can compute immediately tan 2θ.
2 tan θ 2 − 13 3
tan 2θ = 2
1 − tan θ
C
=
1 − −3 1
2 = −
4
From the given information, we deduce that θ lies in QIV. Using one Pythagorean
D
identity, we compute cos θ through sec θ. (We may also use the technique dis-
cussed in Lesson 3.2 by solving for x, y, and r.) Then we proceed to find cos 2θ.
E
s 2 √
p 1 10
2
sec θ = 1 + tan θ = 1 + − =
EP
3 3
√
1 1 3 10
cos θ = = √ =
sec θ 10 10
3
√ !2
D
3 10 4
cos 2θ = 2 cos2 θ − 1 = 2 −1=
10 5
sin 2θ 3
tan 2θ = =⇒ sin 2θ = tan 2θ cos 2θ = − 2
cos 2θ 5
Seatwork/Homework 3.6.1
2 3π
1. If cos θ = 3
and 2
< θ < 2π, find sin 2θ, cos 2θ, and tan 2θ.
√
4 5 1 √
Answer: sin 2θ = − , cos 2θ = − , tan 2θ = 4 5
9 9
208
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3 tan θ − tan3 θ
2. Express tan 3θ in terms of tan θ. Answer: tan 3θ =
1 − 3 tan2 θ
2 tan θ
3. Prove: = sin 2θ.
1 + tan2 θ
2 tan θ 2 tan θ
Solution. = = 2 sin θ cos θ = sin 2θ
1 + tan2 θ sec2 θ
PY
From these identities, we obtain two useful identities expressing sin2 A and cos2 A
in terms of cos 2A as follows:
1 + cos 2A 1 − cos 2A
cos2 A = and sin2 A = .
O
2 2
C
Some Useful Identities
1 + cos 2A 1 − cos 2A
cos2 A = sin2 A =
2 2
D
A
From these identities, replacing A with 2
, we get
E
A
A2 1 + cos 2 2 1 + cos A
cos = =
2 2 2
EP
and
A 1 − cos 2 A2
2 1 − cos A
sin = = .
2 2 2
These are the half-angle identities for sine and cosine.
D
209
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.6.4. Find the exact values of sin 22.5◦ and cos 22.5◦ .
Solution. Clearly, 22.5◦ lies in QI (and so sin 22.5◦ and cos 22.5◦ are both posi-
tive), and 22.5◦ is the half-angle of 45◦ .
s p
r √
2
√
◦ 1 − cos 45 ◦ 1 − 2 2− 2
sin 22.5 = = =
2 2 2
s p
r √
2
√
1 + cos 45 ◦ 1 + 2+ 2
◦
cos 22.5 = = 2
= 2
2 2 2
2 θ tan θ + sin θ
Example 3.6.5. Prove: cos = .
PY
2 2 tan θ
Solution.
2θ 1 + cos θ
cos =
2 2
O
1 + cos θ tan θ
= C 2 tan θ
tan θ + cos θ tan θ
=
2 tan θ
sin θ
tan θ + cos θ · cos θ
=
D
2 tan θ
tan θ + sin θ
= 2
2 tan θ
E
We now derive the first version of the half-angle formula for tangent.
sin A2
EP
A
tan =
2 cos A2
!
sin A2 2 sin A2
=
cos A2 2 sin A2
D
2 sin2 2 A
=
2 sin A2 cos A2
2 · 1−cos
2
A
=
sin 2 · A2
1 − cos A
=
sin A
There is another version of the tangent half-angle formula, and we can derive
it from the first version.
A 1 − cos A
tan =
2 sin A
210
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1 − cos A 1 + cos A
=
sin A 1 + cos A
2
1 − cos A
=
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin2 A
=
(sin A)(1 + cos A)
sin A
=
1 + cos A
PY
A 1 − cos A A sin A
tan = tan =
2 sin A 2 1 + cos A
A sin A2 A 1 − cos A
tan = tan2 =
2 cos A2 2 1 + cos A
O
π
Example 3.6.6. Find the exact value of tan 12 . C
Solution. √
π 1 − cos π6 1− 3 √
tan = π = 1
2
=2− 3 2
12 sin 6 2
D
Example 3.6.7. If sin θ = − 25 , cot θ > 0, and 0 ≤ θ < 2π, find sin 2θ , cos 2θ , and
tan 2θ .
E
Solution. Since sin θ < 0 and cot θ > 0, we conclude the π < θ < 3π 2
. It follows
that
EP
π θ 3π
< < ,
2 2 4
which means that 2θ lies in QII.
s 2 √
p 2 21
D
cos θ = − 1 − sin2 θ = − 1 − − =−
5 5
v √
r u p
u 1 − − 21 √
θ 1 − cos θ t 5 50 + 10 21
sin = = =
2 2 2 10
v √
r u p
u 1 + − 21 √
θ 1 + cos θ t 5 50 − 10 21
cos = − =− =−
2 2 2 10
√
1 − − 521 √
θ 1 − cos θ 5 + 21
tan = = =− 2
2 sin θ − 25 2
211
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.6.2
√
1. Find the exact value of tan π8 . Answer: 2−1
3 3π
2. If cos θ = 5
and 2
< θ < 2π, find sin 2θ , cos 2θ , and tan 2θ .
√ √
5
Answer: sin 2θ = 5
, cos 2θ = − 2 5 5 , tan 2θ = − 12
A 2 2 − 2 cos A
3. Prove: sec = .
2 sin2 A
A 1 2 2(1 − cos A) 2 − 2 cos A
Solution. sec2 = = = =
2 2
cos 2 A
1 + cos A 2
1 − cos A sin2 A
PY
Exercises 3.6
1. Given some information about θ, find sin 2θ, cos 2θ, and tan 2θ.
O
(a) cos θ = − 41 and π
2
<θ<π
√ √
15 15
Answer: sin 2θ = −
C 8
, cos 2θ = − 87 , tan 2θ = 7
5
(b) sec θ = 2
and sin θ > 0
√ √
4 21
Answer: sin 2θ = 25
, cos 2θ = − 17
25
, tan 2θ = − 4 1721
3π
(c) tan θ = −2 and < θ < 2π
D
2
Answer: sin 2θ = − 45 , cos 2θ = − 35 , tan 2θ = 4
3
3
(d) sin θ = and tan θ < 0
E
5
Answer: sin 2θ = − 24
25
, cos 2θ = 7
25
, tan 2θ = − 24
7
EP
2. Given the same information as in Item (1), where 0 ≤ θ < 2π, find sin 2θ , cos 2θ ,
and tan 2θ .
Answer:
√ √ √
10 6 15
(a) sin 2θ = 4
, cos 2θ =4
, tan θ
2
= 3
D
√ √ √
30
(b) sin 2θ = 10
,cos 2θ = 1070 , tan 2θ = 721
√ √ √ √ √
50−10 5 50+10 5 1− 5
(c) sin 2θ = 10
θ
, cos 2 = − 10
, tan 2θ = 2
√ √
3 10
(d) sin 2θ = 10
, cos 2θ = 1010 , tan 2θ = 3
3. Express each expression as one trigonometric expression, but do not find the
exact value.
212
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(c) 1 − 2 sin2 3π
10
Answer: cos 3π
5
1 + cos 8
(d) Answer: cos2 4
2
4. Prove each identity.
(a) tan2 2θ = (csc θ − cot θ)2
θ 1 − cos θ 1 − cos θ 1 − cos θ
Solution. tan2 = = ·
2 1 + cos θ 1 + cos θ 1 − cos θ
(1 − cos θ)2
=
1 − cos2 θ
2
1 − cos θ
PY
= = (csc θ − cot θ)2
sin θ
(b) tan 2θ + cot 2θ = 2 csc θ
θ θ 1 − cos θ sin θ
Solution. tan + cot = +
2 2 sin θ 1 − cos θ
O
(1 − cos θ)2 + sin2 θ
=
(sin θ)(1 − cos θ)
C
1 − 2 cos θ + cos2 θ + sin2 θ
=
(sin θ)(1 − cos θ)
2 − 2 cos θ 2
= = = 2 csc θ
(sin θ)(1 − cos θ)
D
sin θ
(c) sec2 2θ = (csc2 θ)(2 − 2 cos θ)
θ 1 2
E
Solution. sec2 = =
2 cos2 2θ 1 + cos θ
2 1 − cos θ
EP
= ·
1 + cos θ 1 − cos θ
2 − 2 cos θ
= = (csc2 θ)(2 − 2 cos θ)
sin2 θ
5. If a = 2 tan θ, express sin 2θ and cos 2θ in terms of a.
D
4a 4 − a2
Answer: sin 2θ = , cos 2θ =
4 + a2 4 + a2
Solution. sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cos θ
2 tan θ 2 tan θ 2 · a2 4a
= 2 tan θ cos2 θ = 2
= 2
= 2 =
sec θ 1 + tan θ 1 + a2 4 + a2
cos 2θ = 2 cos2 θ − 1
2 2 2 4 − a2
= − 1 = − 1 = 2 − 1 =
sec2 θ 1 + tan2 θ 1 + a2 4 + a2
213
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
1
6. Find the exact value of cos 36◦ − cos 72◦ . Answer:
2
Solution
cos 36◦ − cos 72◦ 2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
cos 36◦ − cos 72◦ = ·
1 2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
2 cos2 36◦ − 2 cos2 72◦
=
2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
(2 cos2 36◦ − 1) − (2 cos2 72◦ − 1)
=
2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
cos 72 − cos 144◦
◦
= Half-Angle Identity
2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
PY
cos 72◦ + cos 36◦
= cos(180◦ − θ) = − cos θ
2(cos 36◦ + cos 72◦ )
1
=
2
O
? 7. The range R of a projectile fired at an acute angle θ with the horizontal and
with an initial velocity of v meters per second is given by
C v2
R= sin(2θ),
g
where g is the acceleration due to gravity, which is 9.81 m/sec2 near the Earth’s
D
surface.
(a) An archer targets an object 100 meters away from her position. If she
E
positions her arrow at an angle of 32◦ and releases the arrow at the speed
of 30 m/sec, will she hit her target? Answer: No
EP
2
30
Solution. R = · sin(2 · 32◦ ) ≈ 82.46 < 100
9.81
(b) If sin θ = 52 , solve for v when R = 50. Answer: v ≈ 25.86 m/sec
√
2 21
Solution. sin θ = and θ acute angle =⇒ cos θ =
D
5√ 5
v2 2 21
50 = ·2· · =⇒ v ≈ 25.86
9.81 5 5
(c) Given v, find the value of θ that gives the largest possible range. At this
v2
θ, what is the range? Answer: θ = 45◦ , largest R =
g
Solution. To reach the largest R, sin(2θ) must be 1.
8. The figure shows a laser scanner projection system. The optical angle θ, throw
distance D, and projected image width W are related by the equation
W
2
D= .
csc θ − cot θ
214
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solve for W in terms D and 2θ . Answer: W = 2D tan 2θ
PY
https://pangolin.com/userhelp/scanangles.htm
O
9. The slope of a mountain makes an angle of 45◦ with the horizontal. At the
base of the mountain, a cannon is fired at an angle θ with the horizontal, where
C
45◦ < θ < 90◦ , and with initial velocity of v m/sec. Neglecting air resistance,
the distance R (in meters) it drops on the slope of the mountain from the base
is given by √
2 2v 2
D
R= (sin θ − cos θ) cos θ,
g
where g is the acceleration due to gravity in m/sec2 . Express this formula for
E
R in terms of 2θ.
√
2 2v 2
EP
215
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 3.7. Inverse Trigonometric Functions
PY
Lesson Outline
(1) Definitions of the six inverse trigonometric functions
(2) Graphs of inverse trigonometric functions
O
(3) Domain and range of inverse trigonometric functions
(4) Evaluation of inverse trigonometric expressions
Introduction
C
In the previous lessons on functions (algebraic and trigonometric), we com-
D
puted for the value of a function at a number in its domain. Now, given a value
in the range of the function, we reverse this process by finding a number in the
domain whose function value is the given one. Observe that, in this process,
E
the function involved may or may not give a unique number in the domain. For
example, each of the functions f (x) = x2 and g(x) = cos x do not give a unique
EP
number in their respective domains for some values of each function. Given
f (x) = 1, the function gives x = ±1. If g(x) = 1, then x = 2kπ, where k is an
integer. Because of this possibility, in order for the reverse process to produce a
function, we restrict this process to one-to-one functions or at least restrict the
domain of a non-one-to-one function to make it one-to-one so that the process
D
works. Loosely speaking, a function that reverses what a given function f does
is called its inverse function, and is usually denoted by f −1 .
Teaching Notes More formally, two functions f and g are inverse functions if
The concept of
inverse function
was studied in g(f (x)) = x for any x in the domain of f ,
General
Mathematics
course.
and
f (g(x)) = x for any x in the domain of g.
We denote the inverse function of a function f by f −1 . The graphs of a function
and its inverse function are symmetric with respect to the line y = x.
216
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In this lesson, we first restrict the domain of each trigonometric function
because each of them is not one-to-one. We then define each respective inverse
function and evaluate the values of each inverse trigonometric function.
All the trigonometric functions that we consider are periodic over their entire
domains. This means that all trigonometric functions are not one-to-one if we
consider their whole domains, which implies that they have no inverses over those
sets. But there is a way to make each of the trigonometric functions one-to-one.
This is done by restricting their respective domains. The restrictions will give us
PY
well-defined inverse trigonometric functions.
The domain of the sine function is the set R of real numbers, and its range is
the closed interval [−1, 1]. As observed in the previous lessons, the sine function
is not one-to-one, and the first step is to restrict its domain (by agreeing what the
convention is) with the following conditions: (1) the sine function is one-to-one
O
in that restricted domain, and (2) the range remains the same.
C
The inverse of the (restricted) sine function
f (x) = sin x, where the
domain is restricted to the closed interval − π2 , π2 , is called the inverse
sine function or arcsine function, denoted by f −1 (x) = sin−1 x or
f −1 (x) = arcsin x. Here, −1
the domain of f (x) = arcsin x is [−1, 1],
D
π π
and its range is − 2 , 2 . Thus,
y = sin−1 x or y = arcsin x
E
if and only if
EP
sin y = x,
where −1 ≤ x ≤ 1 and − π2 ≤ y ≤ π2 .
D
217
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(3) arcsin 0 = 0
(4) sin−1 − 12 = − π6 2
PY
Example 3.7.2. Find the exact value of each expression.
(1) sin sin−1 12 (3) arcsin(sin π)
(2) arcsin sin 3 π
(4) sin sin−1 − 12
Solution. (1) sin sin−1 21 = sin π6 = 1
O
2
√
(2) arcsin sin π3 = arcsin 23 = π3 C
(3) arcsin(sin π) = arcsin 0 = 0
(4) sin sin−1 − 21 = sin − π6 = − 12 2
D
From the last example, we have the following observations:
E
To sketch the graph of y = sin−1 x, Table 3.28 presents the tables of values
for y = sin x and y = sin−1 x. Recall that the graphs of y = sin x and y = sin−1 x
are symmetric with respect to the line y = x. This means that if a point (a, b) is
D
x − π2 − π3 − π4 − π6 0 π
6
π
4
π
3
π
2
y = sin x √ √ √ √
3 2 2 3
y −1 − 2
− 2
− 12 0 1
2 2 2
1
√ √ √ √
3 2 2 3
−1
x −1 − 2
− 2
− 21 0 1
2 2 2
1
y = sin x
y − π2 − π3 − π4 − π6 0 π
6
π
4
π
3
π
2
Table 3.28
218
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted sine function y = sin x is shown
in Figure 3.29(a), while the graph of inverse sine function y = arcsin x is shown
in Figure 3.29(b).
PY
O
(a) y = sin x
C (b) y = sin−1 x
Figure 3.29
D
219
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution 2. In this solution, we graph first the corresponding sine function, and
then use the symmetry with respect to y = x to graph the inverse function.
PY
sin(sin−1 x) = x
for all x ∈ [−1, 1].
But sin−1 (sin x) is
not always x. We
have
sin−1 (sin x) = x
only if
O
− π2 ≤ x ≤ π2 .
C
E D
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.1
EP
220
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Sketch the graph of each equation.
(a) y = sin−1 (x − 2)
PY
O
C
(b) y = sin−1 (2x)
E D
EP
D
221
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.7.2. Inverse Cosine Function
y = cos−1 x or y = arccos x
Teaching Notes means
Observe that this
definition of
cos y = x,
cos−1 x is
equivalent to where −1 ≤ x ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ y ≤ π.
cos−1 x =
π
2
− sin−1 x.
PY
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted cosine function y = cos x is
shown in Figure 3.30(a), while the graph of inverse cosine function y = arccos x
is shown in Figure 3.30(b).
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.30
D
π
Solution. (1) cos−1 0 = 2
because cos π2 = 0 and π
2
∈ [0, π].
√
(2) arccos − 23 = 5π 6
222
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√ √ √
(3) cos cos−1 − 23 = − 23 because − 23 ∈ [−1, 1]
(4) cos−1 cos 3π
4
= because 3π
4
3π
∈ [0, π].
4
√
(5) arccos cos 7π
6
= arccos − 23 = 5π6
√ √
(6) sin cos −1
2
2
= 2
2
2
Example 3.7.5. Simplify: sin arcsin 23 + arccos 21 .
Solution. We know that arccos 12 = π3 . Using the Sine Sum Identity, we have
PY
sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12
= sin arcsin 23 + π3
= sin arcsin 23 cos π3 + cos arcsin 23 sin π3
√
O
= 23 · 21 + cos arcsin 23 · 23
√
= 13 + 23 cos arcsin 23 . C
We compute cos arcsin 23 . Let θ = arcsin 23 . By definition, sin θ = 23 , where
θ lies in QI. Using the Pythagorean identity, we have
p
D
√
cos arcsin 32 = cos θ = 1 − sin2 θ = 35 .
√
sin arcsin 32 + arccos 12 = 13 + 23 cos arcsin 32
EP
√ √
1 3 5
= 3
+ 2
· 3
√
= 2+ 15
6
. 2
Example 3.7.6. Simplify: sin 2 cos−1 − 45 .
D
Solution. Let θ = cos−1 − 45 . Then cos θ = − 54 . Because cos θ < 0 and range
of inverse
cosine function is [0, π], we know that θ must be within the interval
π
2
, π . Using the Pythagorean Identity, we get sin θ = 53 .
Using the Sine Double-Angle Identity, we have
sin 2 cos−1 − 54 = sin 2θ
= 2 sin θ cos θ
= 2 · 35 − 54
= − 24
25
. 2
223
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.7.7. Sketch the graph of y = 41 cos−1 (2x).
Solution.
1 1
y= cos−1 (2x) ⇐⇒ 4y = cos−1 (2x) ⇐⇒ x = cos(4y)
4 2
We graph first y = 12 cos(4x). The domain of this graph comes from the restriction
of cosine as follows:
π
0 ≤ 4x ≤ π =⇒ 0 ≤ x ≤ .
4
Then reflect this graph with respect to y = x, and we finally obtain the graph of
y = 41 cos−1 (2x) (solid line).
PY
O
C
E D
In the last example, we may also use the following technique. In graphing
y = 14 cos−1 (2x), the horizontal length of cos−1 x is reduced to half, while the
EP
224
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.2
PY
4
(f) arccos cos − 13π
3
Answer: π
3
O
9
Solution. Let α = cos−1 32 . This implies that cos α √
= 2
3
and α in
5
QI. Using a Pythagorean identity, one gets sin α = 3 . Similarly, let
β = sin −1
C
− 3 .√This implies that sin β = − 13 and β in QIV. Then,
1
we get cos β = 2 3 2 .
We now use Cosine Difference Identity, and the given and computed
D
values to simplify the expression.
−1 2 −1 1
− sin − = cos(α − β)
E
cos cos
3 3
√ ! √ ! √ √
2 2 2 5 1 4 2− 5
EP
PY
O
(b) y = 12 cos−1 (x + 2)
C
E D
EP
The inverse tangent function is similarly defined as inverse sine and inverse cosine
functions.
y = tan−1 x or y = arctan x
means
tan y = x,
where x ∈ R and − π2 < y < π2 .
226
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The graph (solid thick curve) of the restricted function y = tan x is shown
in Figure 3.31(a), while the graph of inverse function y = arctan x is shown in
Figure 3.31(b).
PY
(a) y = tan x (b) y = tan−1 x
O
Figure 3.31
C
Example 3.7.8. Find the exact value of each expression.
(1) tan−1 1 (4) tan−1 tan − π6
√
D
(2) arctan − 3 (5) tan−1 tan 7π6
5
(3) tan tan −1
−2 (6) arctan tan − 19π6
E
Solution. Note the range of arctan is the open interval − π2 , π2 .
EP
π
(1) tan−1 1 = 4
√
(2) arctan − 3 = − π3
(3) tan tan−1 − 52 = − 25
D
(4) tan−1 tan − π6 = − π6 because − π6 ∈ − π2 , π2 .
(5) Here, note that 7π 6
6∈ − π2 , π2 . Use the idea of reference angle, we know that
tan 7π
6
= tan π6 .
−1 7π −1 π π
tan tan = tan tan =
6 6 6
(6) Here, we cannot use the idea of reference angle, but the idea can help in a
way. The number (or angle) − 19π
6
is in QII, wherein tangent is negative, and
227
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
its reference angle is π6 .
π
19π
arctan tan − = arctan tan −
6 6
π
=− 2
6
Example 3.7.9. Findthe exact value of each expression.
(1) sin 2 tan−1 − 38 (2) tan sin−1 53 − tan−1 14
Solution. (1) Let θ = tan−1 − 38 . Then tan θ = − 83 . Following the notations in
Lesson 3.2 and the definition of inverse tangent
p function, we √
know that θ lies
2
in QIV, and x = 3 and y = −8. We get r = 3 + (−8) = 73. 2
PY
Applying the Sine Double-Angle Identity (page 206) gives
−1 8
sin 2 tan − = sin 2θ
3
= 2 sin θ cos θ
O
y x
=2· ·
r r
8 3
= 2 −√
C 73
√
73
48
=− .
73
D
(2) Using the Tangent Difference Identity, we obtain
E
−1 3 −1 1
tan sin − tan
5 4
−1 3
tan sin 5 − tan tan−1 41
EP
=
1 + tan sin−1 35 tan tan−1 41
tan sin−1 53 − 14
= .
1 + tan sin−1 35 · 41
D
We are left to compute tan sin−1 35 . We proceed as in (1) above. Let
θ = sin−1 35 . Then sin θ = 53 . From the definition of inverse sine function and
the notations used √ in Lesson 3.2, we know that θ lies in QI, and y = 3 and
r = 5. We get x = 52 − 32 = 4, so that tan θ = xy = 34 .
−1 3 −1 1 tan sin−1 53 − 14
tan sin − tan =
5 4 1 + tan sin−1 35 · 41
3
− 41
4
=
1 + 34 · 14
8
= 2
19
228
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? Example 3.7.10. A student is
viewing a painting in a museum.
Standing 6 ft from the painting,
the eye level of the student is 5 ft
above the ground. If the paint-
ing is 10 ft tall, and its base is
4 ft above the ground, find the
viewing angle subtended by the
painting at the eyes of the stu-
dent.
PY
Solution. Let θ be the viewing angle, and let θ = α + β as shown below.
We observe that
1 9
tan α = and tan β = .
6 6
O
Using the Tangent Sum Identity, we have
tan α + tan β
tan θ = tan(α + β) =
1 − tan α tan β
C
1
+9
= 6 169
1− 6 · 6
D
20
= .
9
E
It follows that the domain of y = cot−1 x is R and its range is (0, π). different domain
restrictions. The
restrictions we
made aim to make
calculus
computations
y = sec−1 x or y = arcsec x easier in the future.
means
sec y = x,
π 3π
where |x| ≥ 1 and y ∈ 0, 2 ∪ π, 2 .
229
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Define
π
− sec−1 x.
csc−1 x =
2
This means that thedomainof y = csc−1 x is (−∞, −1] ∪ [1, ∞) and
its range is −π, − π2 ∪ 0, π2 .
The graphs of these last three inverse trigonometric functions are shown in
Figures 3.32, 3.33, and 3.34, respectively.
PY
O
C
D
(a) y = cot x (b) y = cot−1 x
Figure 3.32
E
EP
D
Figure 3.33
230
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) y = csc x (b) y = csc−1 x
PY
Figure 3.34
Observe that the process in getting the value of an inverse function is the
O
same to all inverse functions. That is, y = f −1 (x) is the same as f (y) = x. We
need to remember the range of each inverse trigonometric function. Table 3.35
summarizes all the information about the six inverse trigonometric functions.
C
Function Domain Range Graph
π π Figure
D
sin−1 x [−1, 1] −2, 2
3.29(b)
Figure
E
tan−1 x R − π2 , π2
3.31(b)
Figure
cot−1 x R (0, π)
3.32(b)
D
π 3π Figure
sec−1 x {x : |x| ≥ 1} 0, 2 ∪ π, 2
3.33(b)
Figure
csc−1 x {x : |x| ≥ 1} −π, − π2 ∪ 0, π2
3.34(b)
Table 3.35
231
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4π
Solution. (1) sec−1 (−2) = 3
because sec 4π
3
= −2 and 4π
3
∈ π, 3π
2
√
(2) csc−1
− 2 3 3 = − 2π
3
√ 5π
(3) cot−1 − 3 = 6
√
(4) From (2), we know that csc−1 − 2 3 3 = − 2π
3
. Let θ = sec−1
− 3
2
. Then
sec θ = − 32 . From defined range of inverse secant function and the notations
in Lesson
p 3.2, θ lies in QIII,
√ and r = 3 and x = −2.√ Solving for y, we get
y = − 3 − (−2) = − 5. It follows that sin θ = − 35 and cos θ = − 23 .
2 2
PY
√ !!
−1 3 −1 2 3 2π
sin sec − − csc − = sin θ − −
2 3 3
2π
= sin θ +
O
3
2π 2π
= sin θ cos + cos θ sin
3 3
√ ! √ !
= −
C5
−
1
+ −
2 3
3 2 3 2
√ √
5−2 3
D
= 2
6
E
Seatwork/Homework 3.7.3
EP
2 2
(d) cot (cot−1 (−10)) Answer: −10
(e) sec−1 − tan 3π4
Answer: 0
(f) csc csc−1 − 38 Answer: − 83
2. Simplify each expression.
√ √
6 10 + 210
(a) cos arcsec 52 − arccot 3 Answer:
50
Solution. Let α = arcsec 52 and β = arccot 3. These imply that sec α =
5
2
and cot β = 3, where
√
α and β are
√
both in QI. We√obtain the following:
cos α = 5 , sin α = 5 , cos β = 10 , and sin β = 1010 .
2 21 3 10
232
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Using Cosine Difference Identity and the above values, we simplify the
expression as follows:
5
− arccot 3) = cos α cos β + sin α sin β
cos(arcsec
2
√ ! √ ! √ !
2 3 10 21 10
= +
5 10 5 10
√ √
6 10 + 210
=
50
1 5 7
(b) tan tan−1 − + tan−1 Answer:
PY
2 3 11
Solution
−1 1 −1 5
1 5 tan tan − + tan tan
tan tan−1 − + tan−1 = 2 3
2 3 1 − tan tan−1 − 21 tan tan−1 53
− 12 + 35 7
O
= 1
5 =
1 − −2 3 11
Exercises 3.7
C
1. Find the exact value of each expression.
D
(a) sin−1 − 21 Answer: − π6
E
π
(b) cos−1 0 Answer: 2
√ π
(c) tan−1 3 Answer: 3
EP
π
(d) csc−1 1 Answer: 2
(e) sec−1 (−2) Answer: 4π
3
3π
(f) cot−1 (−1) Answer: 4
1
(g) csc−1 Answer: Undefined
D
2
? 2. Find the value of each expression using a calculator. Round your answer to
two decimal places.
233
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Simplify each expression.
(a) cos−1 cos π3 Answer: π
3
(b) csc−1 tan π6 Answer: undefined
(c) tan−1 tan 5π 4
Answer: π
4
(d) sin−1 cos − π4 Answer: π
4
(e) cos−1 csc π3 Answer: π
6
PY
−1
(b) cos tan −1
3 + sin − 23 Answer: 1
(c) tan (2 tan−1 (−1)) Answer: undefined
(d) cos tan−1 34 + cos−1 13 5
Answer: − 33
65
√
O
(e) sin 2 sin−1 12 − 3 tan−1 3
3
Answer: − 12
(a) x = sin 3t
C Answer: t = 13 sin−1 x
x
(b) x = 2 tan(t + 1) Answer: t = tan−1 2
−1
D
cos−1 (2x)−1
(c) x = 21 cos(2t + 1) Answer: t = 2
(d) x = 2 − 23 sec(1 − t) Answer: t = 1 − sec −1 2
3
(2 − x)
E
1 2 1 −1 1
(e) x = 2
− cot(2 − 3t) Answer: t = 3 − 3 cot 2
− x
EP
(a) y = cos−1 (x + 1)
D
234
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) y = sin−1 (x − 2)
PY
(c) y = sin−1 2x
O
C
E D
EP
x
(d) y = cos−1
2
D
235
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) y = 2 cos−1 (x − 1)
PY
(f) y = − 21 sin−1 (2x)
O
C
E D
EP
236
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(h) y = −2 cos−1 (2x − 1)
PY
O
7. Solve for x in the equation sin−1 (x2 − 2x) = − π2 . Answer: x = 1
8. Solve for x in the equation tan−1 (4x2 + 5x − 7) = − π4 . Answer: −2, 43
C
9. A woman is standing x ft from a wall with a billboard nailed on it. The
billboard is 15 ft tall, and its base is 6 ft above the eye level of the woman.
Find the viewing angle subtended on the eyes of the woman from the base to
D
15x
the top of the billboard. Answer: tan−1 2
x + 126
? 10. During a leap year, the number of hours of daylight in a city can be modeled
E
by D(t) = 12 + 2.4 sin(0.017t − 1.377), where t is the day of the year (that is,
t = 1 means January 1, t = 60 is February 29, and so on).
EP
(a) Give one day of that year whose number of hours of daylight is about
14.4. Answer: ≈ 173 days, so the day would be June 21
(b) Find another day of that year whose number of hours of daylight is the
same as that of February 29.
D
where P (t) is the percentage of his annual income that he was able to save on
year t after he got a job.
(a) What percentage of his annual income did he save on the second year?
Answer: 7.58% of his annual income
237
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) On what year right after getting a job did he save the least?
Answer: 20 years after getting a job
(c) On what year right after getting a job did he save the most? When would
it happen again? Answer: 40 years after getting a job
(d) If he got his job at the age of 20, how much will he save on the year of
his retirement (that is, when he is 60)? Answer: 7.7% of his annual
income
PY
Solution. Let θ = tan−1 x, where x is any real number. This implies that
tan θ = x. One can think of a right triangle, with acute angle θ whose
opposite side is x and adjacent side as 1. Solving for the hypotenuse,
√ adjacent side 1
√
1+x2
we get 1 + x2 . Thus cos θ = = √1+x2 = . But
hypotenuse
√
1+x2
O
1+x2
θ = tan−1 x, therefore, cos(tan−1 x) = 1+x 2 .
1
sin(tan−1 x + tan−1 )
x
= sin(α + β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β
x x 1 1
= √ √ + √ √
1 + x2 1 + x2 1 + x2 1 + x2
x2 + 1
= = 1.
1 + x2
1
It follows that tan−1 x + tan−1 x
= π2 .
238
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d) sin−1 x + cos−1 x = π2 , x ∈ [−1, 1]
Solution. Same as in (c), we show that sin(sin−1 x + cos−1 x) = 1, where
x ∈ [−1, 1].
Let α = sin−1 x and β = cos−1 x. It follows that sin α = x and√cos β = x.
Using fundamental identities, we obtain the following: cos α = 1 − x2 =
sin β.
Then, we do the following manipulations:
sin(sin−1 x + cos−1 x) = sin(α + β)
= sin α cos β + cos α sin β
√ √
= x(x) + ( 1 − x2 )( 1 − x2 )
PY
= x2 + 1 − x2
= 1.
Therefore, sin−1 x + cos−1 x = π2 .
O
4
Lesson Outline
(1) Definition of a trigonometric equation
D
Introduction
We have studied equations in Lesson 3.4. We differentiated an identity from
a conditional equation. Recall that an identity is an equation that is true for all
values of the variable in the domain of the equation, while a conditional equation
is an equation that is not an identity.
In this lesson, we mostly study conditional trigonometric equations. Though
not explicitly, we have started it in the preceding lesson. For example, the equa-
tion sin x = 12 has the unique solution x = sin−1 12 = π6 in the closed interval
239
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
− π2 , π2 . However, if we consider the entire domain (not the restricted domain)
of the sine function, which is the set R of real numbers, there are solutions (other
than π6 ) of the equation sin x = 21 . This current lesson explores the techniques of
solving (conditional) trigonometric equations.
We divide the lesson into two groups of equations: the ones using a basic way
of solving, and those using more advanced techniques.
PY
The word
“solution” has two
of the equation that, when substituted to the variable, makes the equation true.
meanings in our The set of all solutions of an equation is called the solution set of the equation.
discussion. One is
a process of solving Technically, the basic method to show that a particular number is a solution
a problem, and the
other is a number of an equation is to substitute the number to the variable and see if the equation
O
that makes an becomes true. However, we may use our knowledge gained from the previous
equation true. The
intended meaning lessons to do a quicker verification process by not doing the manual substitution
depends on the and checking. We use this technique in the example.
context of its
usage.
C
Example 3.8.1. Which numbers in the set 0, π6 , π4 , π3 , π2 , 2π , 3π 5π
, , π, 2π
are
3 4 6
Teaching Notes solutions to the following equations?
In the process of
D
showing that a (1) sin x = 1
2
(7) cos2 x = cos 2x + sin2 x
number is a
solution of an (2) tan x = 1 (8) sin x + cos 2x = 0
equation, note that √
E
means that we
cannot use the (5) sec2 x − tan2 x = 1 (11) sin 2x = sin x
equality sign yet in
the process. (6) sin x + cos x = 0 (12) 2 tan x + 4 sin x = 2 + sec x
Solution. Note that the choices (except 2π) are numbers within the interval [0, π].
D
To quickly determine which numbers among the choices are solutions to a par-
Teaching Notes ticular equation, we use some distinctive properties of the possible solutions.
In the actual
classroom
discussion, you
may only choose
(1) The sine function is positive on (0, π). From Lesson 3.2, we recall that π6 is
some of these an obvious solution. We may imagine the graph of y = sin x. We may also
items.
use the idea of reference angle. Thus, among the choices, only π6 and 5π
6
are
1
the only solutions of sin x = 2 .
(2) Since tan x = 1 > 0, any solution of the equation among the choices must
π
be in the interval 0, 2 (that is, in QI). Again, among the choices, the only
solution to tan x = 1 is π4 .
240
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
√
(3) Here, the given equation is equivalent to sec x = − 2 3 3 . Among the choices, Teaching Notes
√ For convenience in
the only solution of the equation 3 sec x = −2 3 is 5π6
. showing or finding
a solution of an
(4) Eliminating
√
the absolute
√
value sign, the given equation is equivalent to√cot x = equation, we may
use an equivalent
3
or cot x = − 3 . Among the choices, the only solution of cot x = 33 is π3 ,
3
equation. By
3 √ definition, the
while the other equation has 2π 3
. Thus, the only solutions of 3| cot x| = 1 solutions of the
from the given set are π3 and 2π3
. equivalent equation
are exactly the
same as the
(5) The given equation is one of the Pythagorean Identities (page 182). It means solutions of the
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are solutions. The domain original equation.
PY
(6) For the sum of sin x and cos x to be 0, they must have equal absolute values
but different signs. Among the choices, only 3π
4
satisfies these properties, and
it is the only solution of sin x + cos x = 0.
O
(7) This equations is one of the Double-Angle Identities for Cosine. This means
that all numbers in the domain of the equation are its solutions. Because the
domain of the given equation is R, all numbers in the given set are solutions
of cos2 x = cos 2x + sin2 x.
C
(8) We substitute each number in the choices to the expression on the left-side
of the equation, and select those numbers that give resulting values equal to
D
1. Teaching Notes
If one side of an
equation is
x = 0: sin 0 + cos 2(0) = 0 + 1 = 1
E
2 2
x = π4 : sin π4 + cos 2( π4 ) = 2
+ 0 = 2 basic method of
√ √ showing that a
3 3−1
x = π3 : sin π3 + cos 2( π3 ) = 2
− 1
2
= 2
number is a
solution of the
x = π2 : sin π2 + cos 2( π2 ) = 1 − 1 = 0 equation is more
appropriate; that
√ √
2π 3 3−1 is, to start on the
x= : sin 2π + cos 2( 2π )= − 1
=
D
3 3 3 2 2 2 non-constant side,
√ √ then substitute the
2
x= 3π
4
: sin 3π
4
+ cos 2( 3π
4
)= 2
+ 0 = 22 number to the
variable, simplify
5π
x= 6
: sin 5π
6
+ cos 2( 5π
6
)= 1
2
+ 12 = 1 the expression, and
end on the value of
x = π: sin π + cos 2π = 0 + 1 = 1 the constant on the
other side.
x = 2π: sin 2π + cos 2(2π) = 0 + 1 = 1
From these values, the only solution of sin x + cos 2x = 0 among the choices
is π2 .
(9) We again substitute the numbers in the given set one by one, and see which
resulting values are equal to 1.
241
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x = 0: 2 sin 0 + tan 0 − 2 cos 0 = −2
√
3−2 3
x = π6 : 2 sin π6 + tan π6 − 2 cos π6 = 3
x = π4 : 2 sin π4 + tan π4 − 2 cos π4 = 1
√
x = π3 : 2 sin π3 + tan π3 − 2 cos π3 = 2 3 − 1
x = π2 : Since tan π2 is undefined, this value of x cannot be a solution of the
equation.
2π
x= 3
2 sin 2π
: 3
+ tan 2π
3
− 2 cos 2π
3
=1
√
x = 3π
4
: 2 sin 3π
4
+ tan 3π
4
− 2 cos 3π
4
=2 2−1
√
5π 3+2 3
x= : 2 sin 5π + tan 5π − 2 cos 5π =
PY
6 6 6 6 3
x = π: 2 sin π + tan π − 2 cos π = 2
x = 2π: 2 sin 2π + tan 2π − 2 cos 2π = −2
Thus, the only solution of 2 sin x + tan x − 2 cos x = 2 from the given set is π.
O
(10) This equation has no solution because one of the Pythagorean Identities says
sin2 x + cos2 x = 1. C
(11) We substitute each number in the given set to the expression of each side of
Teaching Notes the equation, and see which resulting values are equal.
If both sides of an
equation are both
D
non-constant
x = 0: sin 2(0) = 0; sin 0 = 0
expressions, one √
3
method of showing
that a number is a
x = π6 : sin 2( π6 ) = 2
; sin π6 = 1
2
E
solution of the √
2
equation is to x = π4 : sin 2( π4 ) = 1; sin π4 = 2
substitute the
EP
number to both √ √
3 3
expressions (but x = π3 : sin 2( π3 ) = 2
; sin π3 = 2
never join them
with equality sign
because they are x = π2 : sin 2( π2 ) = 0; sin π2 = 1
not yet equal
logically), and √
3π 2
x= : sin 2( 3π ) = −1; sin 3π =
D
check if the
4 4 4 2
resulting values are
equal. √
5π 3
x= 6
: sin 2( 5π
6
)=− 2
; sin π3 = 1
2
x = π: sin 2π = 0; sin π = 0
Thus, among the numbers in the given set, the solutions of sin 2x = sin x are
0, π3 , π, and 2π.
242
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(12) We employ the same technique used in the previous item.
PY
2 + sec π3 = 4
π
x= 2
: Both tan π2 and sec π2 are undefined.
2π
x= 3
: 2 tan 2π
3
+ 4 sin 2π
3
=0
O
2 + sec 2π
3
=0
3π
√
x= 4
: 2 tan 3π
4
+ 4 sin 3π
4
=2 2−2
2 + sec 3π
4
= 2 −
√
2
C
√
5π 6−2 3
x= 6
: 2 tan 5π
6
+ 4 sin 5π
6
= 3
√
D
6−2 3
2 + sec 5π
6
= 3
2 + sec π = 1
EP
x = 2π : 2 tan 2π + 4 sin 2π = 0
2 + sec 2π = 3
After checking the equal values, the solutions of 2 tan x + 4 sin x = 2 + sec x
among the given choices are π6 , 2π , and 5π . 2
D
3 6
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.1
In each equation, list down its solutions from the set − π3 , − π4 , π6 , π4 , 2π
3
, π, 3π
2
.
√ π
(1) 3 sec θ = 2 Answer: 6
243
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.8.2. Equations with One Term
From the preceding discussion, you may observe that there may be more solutions
of a given equation outside the given set. We now find all solutions of a given
equation.
We will start with a group of equations having straightforward techniques
in finding their solutions. These simple techniques involve at least one of the
following ideas:
(1) equivalent equations (that is, equations that have the same solutions as the
original equation);
PY
(2) periodicity of the trigonometric function involved;
(4) values of the trigonometric function involved on the interval [0, π] or [0, 2π]
O
(depending on the periodicity of the function); and
1
cos x = .
2
On the interval [0, 2π], there are only two solutions of the last equation, and these
are x = π3 (this is in QI) and x = 5π3
(in QIV).
D
Because the period of cosine function is 2π, the complete solutions of the
equation are x = π3 + k(2π) and x = 5π
3
+ k(2π) for all integers k. 2
244
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution. By the Zero-Factor Law, the given equation is equivalent to
1 + cos θ = 0 or tan θ − 1 = 0
cos θ = −1 tan θ = 1
θ = π + 2kπ, k ∈ Z θ= π
4
+ kπ, k ∈ Z.
π
Therefore, the solutions of the equation are θ = π + 2kπ and θ = 4
+ kπ for all
k ∈ Z. 2
Example 3.8.4. Find all values of x in the interval [−2π, 2π] that satisfy the
equation (sin x − 1)(sin x + 1) = 0.
PY
Solution.
sin x − 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0
sin x = 1 sin x = −1
O
π 3π 3π π
x= 2
or − 2
x= 2
or − 2
Solutions: π
, − 3π , 3π
, − π2 2
C 2 2 2
We can use this solution to get a particular solution in QIV, and this is x =
2π − cos−1 0.1, which is equivalent to x = − cos−1 0.1.
From the above particular solutions, we can produce all solutions of cos x =
0.1, and these are x = cos−1 0.1+2kπ and x = − cos−1 0.1+2kπ for all k ∈ Z. 2
D
Solution.
3 tan θ + 5 = 0 =⇒ tan θ = − 35
We expect only one solution in any one-period interval.
tan θ = − 53 =⇒ θ = tan−1 − 53 + kπ, k ∈ Z 2
? Example 3.8.7. The voltage V (in volts) coming from an electricity distribut-
ing company is fluctuating according to the function V (t) = 200 + 170 sin(120πt)
at time t in seconds.
245
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(1) Determine the first time it takes to reach 300 volts.
(2) For what values of t does the voltage reach its maximum value?
Solution. (1) We solve for the least positive value of t such that V (t) = 300.
PY
t= ≈ 0.00167 seconds
120π
(2) The maximum value of V (t) happens when and only when the maximum
value of sin(120πt) is reached. We know that the maximum value of sin(120πt)
is 1, and it follows that the maximum value of V (t) is 370 volts. Thus, we
O
need to solve for all values of t such that sin(120πt) = 1.
sin(120πt) = 1
π
C
120πt = + 2kπ, k nonnegative integer
2
π
+ 2kπ
t= 2
D
120π
1
+ 2k
t= 2 ≈ 0.00417 + 0.017k
E
120
This means that the voltage is maximum when t ≈ 0.00417 + 0.017k for each
EP
nonnegative integer k. 2
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.2
2. Find all values of the variable in the interval [−2π, 2π] that satisfy the given
equation.
246
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3.8.3. Equations with Two or More Terms
Solution.
PY
2 cos x tan x = 2 cos x
2 cos x tan x − 2 cos x = 0
(2 cos x)(tan x − 1) = 0 Teaching Notes
The method for
solving
O
2 cos x = 0 or tan x − 1 = 0 trigonometric
equations follows
cos x = 0 tan x = 1 the usual way of
solving nonlinear
x = π2 + 2kπ or
C x = π4 + kπ, equations; that is,
x = 3π
2
+ 2kπ, k∈Z transform the
equation so that
k∈Z one side is 0, and
D
then factor.
Solutions: π
2
+ 2kπ, 3π
2
+ 2kπ, π
4
+ kπ, k ∈ Z 2
Solution.
EP
sin 2x = sin x
sin 2x − sin x = 0
2 sin x cos x − sin x = 0 Sine Double-Angle Identity
D
sin x = 0 or 2 cos x − 1 = 0
1
x = 0 or x = π cos x = 2
π 5π
x= 3
or x = 3
Solutions: 0, π, π 5π
3
, 3 2
247
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Tips in Solving Trigonometric Equations
(1) If the equation contains only one trigonometric term, isolate that
term, and solve for the variable.
(3) Rewrite the equation to have 0 on one side, and then factor (if
appropriate) the expression on the other side.
PY
Here, identities are useful.
O
the angle. Half-angle and double-angle identities are useful in
simplification. C
Example 3.8.10. Solve for x ∈ [0, 2π): 2 cos2 x = 1 + sin x.
Solution.
D
2 cos2 x = 1 + sin x
2(1 − sin2 x) = 1 + sin x
E
Pythagorean Identity
2 sin2 x + sin x − 1 = 0
EP
2 sin x − 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0
1
sin x = sin x = −1
D
2
π 5π 3π
x= 6
or x = 6
x= 2
Solutions: π 5π 3π
6
, 6, 2 2
Example 3.8.11. Solve for x ∈ [0, 2π) in the equation 3 cos2 x + 2 sin x = 2.
Solution.
3 cos2 x + 2 sin x = 2
3(1 − sin2 x) + 2 sin x = 2 Pythagorean Identity
(3 sin x + 1)(sin x − 1) = 0 Factoring
248
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3 sin x + 1 = 0 or sin x − 1 = 0
sin x = − 13 sin x = 1
x = sin−1 (− 31 ) + 2π x= π
2
or
x = π − sin−1 (− 13 )
PY
2
3π
is QIII), and another in ( 2 , 2π) (which is QIV). Since no special number satisfies
sin x = − 13 , we use inverse sine function. Because the range of sin−1 is [− π2 , π2 ], we Teaching Notes
know that − π2 < sin−1 (− 13 ) < 0. From this value, to get the solution in ( 3π 2
, 2π), Using the reference
angle of sin−1 ( 31 ),
−1 1
we simply add 2π to this value, resulting to x = sin (− 3 ) + 2π. On the other we get two
hand, to get the solution in (π, 3π ), we simply add − sin−1 (− 31 ) to π, resulting to solutions (QIII and
O
2 QIV), and these
x = π − sin−1 (− 13 ). are π + sin−1 ( 13 )
and 2π − sin−1 ( 31 ).
x
Example 3.8.12. Solve: sin2 x + 5 cos2
C 2
= 2.
Solution.
D
x
sin2 x + 5 cos2 = 2
2
2 1 + cos x
sin x + 5 =2 Cosine Half-Angle Identity
E
2
2 sin2 x + 5 cos x + 1 = 0
EP
2 cos x + 1 = 0 or cos x − 3 = 0
cos x = − 12 cos x = 3
x = 2π
3
+ 2kπ or no solution
4π
x = 3 + 2kπ,
k∈Z
Solutions: 2π
3
+ 2kπ, 4π
3
+ 2kπ, k ∈ Z 2
Example 3.8.13. Solve for x ∈ [0, 2π) in the equation tan 2x − 2 cos x = 0.
249
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
tan 2x − 2 cos x = 0
sin 2x
− 2 cos x = 0
cos 2x
sin 2x − 2 cos x cos 2x = 0
Apply the Double-Angle Identities for Sine and Cosine, and then factor.
PY
2 cos x = 0 or 2 sin x − 1 = 0 or sin x + 1 = 0
1
cos x = 0 sin x = 2
sin x = −1
O
x = π2 or x = π6 or x= 3π
2
x = 3π2 C x = 5π6
These values of x should be checked in the original equation because tan 2x may
not be defined. Upon checking, this is not the case for each value of x obtained.
The solutions are π2 , 3π
2
, π6 , 5π
6
, and 3π
2
. 2
D
? Example 3.8.14. A weight is suspended from a spring and vibrating vertically
according to the equation
E
f (t) = 20 cos 45 π t − 56 ,
EP
where f (t) centimeters is the directed distance of the weight from its central
position at t seconds, and the positive distance means above its central position.
(1) At what time is the displacement of the weight 5 cm below its central
position for the first time?
D
(2) For what values of t does the weight reach its farthest point below its central
position?
Solution. (1) We find the least positive value of t such that f (t) = −5.
20 cos 45 π t − 56 = −5
cos 45 π t − 56 = − 41
250
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• 4
5
π t− 5
6
= cos−1 − 14 + 2kπ, k ∈ Z
5 cos−1 (− 14 )+2kπ
t= 6
+ 4
π
5
In this family of solutions, the least positive value of t happens when
k = 0, and this is
5 cos−1 − 41 + 2(0)π
t= + 4 ≈ 1.5589.
6 5
π
• 4
5
π t− 5
6
= 2π − cos−1 − 14 + 2kπ, k ∈ Z
5 2π−cos−1 (− 14 )+2kπ
t= +
PY
6 4
π
5
Here, the least positive value of t happens when k = −1, and this is
5 2π − cos−1 − 41 + 2(−1)π
t= + 4 ≈ 0.1078.
6 π
O
5
Therefore, the first time that the displacement of the weight is 5 cm below
its central position is at about 0.1078 seconds.
C
(2) The minimum value of f (t) happens when and only when the minimum
value of cos 45 π t − 56 is reached. The minimum value of cos 54 π t − 56 is
−1, which implies that the farthest point the weight can reach below its
D
central position
is 20 cm. Thus, we need to solve for all values of t such that
cos 54 π t − 65 = −1.
E
cos 45 π t − 56 = −1
4 5
= cos−1 (−1) + 2kπ, k ≥ 0
EP
5
π t − 6
4
5
π t − 56 = π + 2kπ
5 π+2kπ 25
t= 6
+ 4 = 12
+ 52 k
π
5
D
Therefore, the weight reaches its farthest point (which is 20 cm) below its
25
central position at t = 12 + 52 k for every integer k ≥ 0. 2
Seatwork/Homework 3.8.3
251
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Find the solutions in the interval [0, 2π).
Exercises 3.8
PY
(c) tan x + 1 = 0 Answer: 3π
4
+ kπ, k ∈ Z
(d) cos 3x = 0 Answer: 16 π(2k − 1), k ∈ Z
(e) tan 4x − 1 = 0 Answer: 1
16
π(4k + 1), k ∈ Z
Answer: kπ, k ∈ Z
O
2
(f) sec x − 1 = 0
(g) sec2 x + 6 tan x + 4 = 0 Answer: − π4 + kπ, tan−1 (−5) + kπ, k ∈ Z
Answer: − π3 + 2kπ, π
+ 2kπ, k ∈ Z
(h) cos 2x + 3 = 5 cos x
C 3
(i) cos2 x + sin2 x
2
=1 Answer: 2π
3
+ 2kπ, 4π
3
+ 2kπ, 2kπ, k ∈ Z
x
(j) 6 sec2 + 3 = 7 tan x2
2
D
Answer: 2 tan−1 − 13 + 2kπ, 2 tan−1 23 + 2kπ, k ∈ Z
252
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(c) 3 cos 2x − 3 cos x = 0 Answer: 0◦ , 120◦
? (d) 6 sec2 x + 3 = 7 tan x Answer: 161.6◦ , 56.3◦
? (e) tan2 x + tan x = 6 Answer: 63.4◦ , 108.4◦
? 4. A weight is suspended from a spring and vibrating vertically according to the
equation
f (t) = 25.2 sin(3.8t − 2.1),
where f (t) centimeters is the directed distance of the weight from its cen-
tral position at t seconds, and the positive distance means above its central
position.
PY
(a) Find the times when the weight is at its central position.
Solution. We solve the equation f (t) = 0.
O
3.8t − 2.1 = kπ k nonnegative integer
2.1 + kπ
t =
C 3.8
t ≈ 0.55 + 0.83k
(b) For what values of t does the weight reach its farthest point below its
central position?
EP
Solution. The weight reaches it farthest point below the central position
when sin(3.8t − 2.1) = −1. Solving for t, we get
sin(3.8t − 2.1) = −1
3π
3.8t − 2.1 = + 2kπ where k is a whole number
D
2
3π+4kπ
2
+ 2.1
t = where k is a whole number
3.8
(3 + 4k)π + 4.2
t = where k is a whole number
7.6
t ≈ 1.79 + 1.65k where k is a whole number
Therefore, the weight reaches it farthest point below the central position
at t ≈ 1.79 + 1.65k seconds (where k is a whole number). For instance,
at t = 1.79 s, t = 3.44 s, t = 5.09 s, etc.
253
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? 5. The finance department of a car company conducted a study of their weekly
sales in the past years, and came out with the following approximating func-
tion:
s(t) = 12.18 cos(0.88t − 7.25) + 20.40, t ≥ 0,
where s(t) represents weekly car sales in million pesos at week t (t = 0 repre-
sents the start of the study).
PY
= 12.18 cos(−7.25) + 20.40
= (12.18)(0.5679) + 20.40
= 27.32
The weekly sales of the car company at the start of the study is approx-
O
imately 27.32 million pesos.
(b) Find the projected maximum and minimum weekly sales of the company.
C
Solution. The projected maximum and minimum weekly sales of the
company are attained when the cosine values are 1 and −1, respectively.
Thus, the maximum weekly sales is 12.18 + 20.40 = 32.58 million pesos,
and the minimum weekly sales is −12.18 + 20.40 = 8.22 million pesos.
D
(c) If the company were able to reach its maximum sales this week, when
will the next projected maximum weekly sales and upcoming projected
E
2π
one period. That is, P = 0.88 ≈ 7.14. Hence, if the company were able
to reach its maximum sales this week, then the next projected maximum
weekly sales will be after about 7 weeks.
On the other hand, the upcoming minimum weekly sales is projected after
D
254
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
We get
−1 520
0.88t − 7.25 = cos − + 2kπ, k ∈ Z =⇒ t ≈ 11.19 + 7.14k
609
or
−1 520
0.88t − 7.25 = − cos − + 2kπ =⇒ t ≈ 5.29 + 7.14k.
609
PY
7.14(−1) ≈ 4.05. Thus, about 4 weeks after the start of the study, the
company experienced a weekly sales of only 10 million for the first time.
? 6. After many years in business, the financial analyst of a shoe company projected
that the monthly costs of producing their products and monthly revenues from
O
the sales of their products are fluctuating according to the following formulas:
and
C
R(t) = 2.6 + 1.82 cos(0.52t − 7.25),
D
where C(t) and R(t) are the costs and revenues in million of pesos at month t
(t = 0 represents January 2010). About how many months after January 2010
did the company experience a zero profit for the first time?
E
Solution. The profit is zero when the revenue is the same as the cost.
EP
7.25 + tan−1 91
29
+ kπ
t= ≈ 16.37 + 6.04k
0.52
The company experienced zero profit for the first time about 16.37+6.04(−2) ≈
4.29 or 4 months after January 2010.
7. If x be a real number such that
2 1
cos 2x = and cos x − sin x = ,
3 2
what is cos x + sin x?
255
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Solution.
2
cos 2x =
3
2
cos2 x − sin2 x =
3
2
(cos x + sin x)(cos x − sin x) =
3
1 2
(cos x + sin x) =
2 3
4
cos x + sin x =
3
PY
8. Solve for x ∈ [−π, π): 16 sin4 x + 1 = 8 sin2 x.
Solution.
16 sin4 x + 1 8 sin2 x
=
O
16 sin4 x − 8 sin2 x + 1 0 =
(4 sin2 x − 1)2 0 =
C
4 sin2 x − 1 0 =
1
sin x = ±
2
5π π
D
x = ± ,±
6 6
E
sin + θ + sin −θ = .
3 3 8
Solution.
π 3 π
sin + θ + sin −θ =
D
3 3 8
π π π π 3
sin cos θ + cos sin θ + sin cos θ − cos sin θ =
3 3 3 3 8
π 3
2 sin cos θ =
3 8
√ 3
3 cos θ =
8
√ !
3
θ = cos−1
8
256
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
10. In 4ABC, angles A and B (in degrees) satisfy
PY
9 cos2 A + 6 cos A sin B + sin2 B = 4
9 + 6 sin(A + B) + 1 = 13
O
6 sin(A + B) = 3
1
sin(A + B) =
2
C A + B = 30◦ , 150◦
4
EP
Lesson Outline
(1) Polar coordinate system: pole and polar axis
257
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(2) Polar coordinates of a point and its location
(3) Conversion from polar to rectangular coordinates, and vice versa
(4) Simple graphs and applications
Introduction
Two-dimensional coordinate systems are used to describe a point in a plane.
We previously used the Cartesian or rectangular coordinate system to locate a
point in the plane. That point is denoted by (x, y), where x is the signed dis-
tance of the point from the y-axis, and y is the signed distance of the point
from the x-axis. We sketched the graphs of equations (lines, circles, parabolas,
ellipses, and hyperbolas) and functions (polynomial, rational, exponential, log-
PY
arithmic, trigonometric, and inverse trigonometric) in the Cartesian coordinate
plane. However, it is often convenient to locate a point based on its distance
from a fixed point and its angle with respect to a fixed ray. Not all equations
can be graphed easily using Cartesian coordinates. In this lesson, we also use
another coordinate system, which can be presented in dartboard-like plane as
O
shown below.
C
E D
EP
D
258
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In the polar coordinate system, a point is described by the ordered pair (r, θ).
The radial coordinate r refers to the directed distance of the point from the pole.
The angular coordinate θ refers to a directed angle (usually in radians) from the
polar axis to the segment joining the point and the pole.
PY
O
Because a point in polar coordinate system is described by an order pair of
C
radial coordinate and angular coordinate, it will be more convenient to geomet-
rically present the system in a polar plane, which serves just like the Cartesian
plane. In the polar plane shown below, instead of rectangular grids in the Carte-
D
sian plane, we have concentric circles with common center at the pole to identify
easily the distance from the pole (radial coordinate) and angular rays emanating
from the pole to show the angles from the polar axis (angular coordinate).
E
EP
D
259
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.9.1. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(3, π3 ), B(1, 5π6
),
7π 19π 7π 17π 17π 5π
C(2, 6 ), D(4, 12 ), E(3, −π), F (4, − 6 ), G(2.5, 4 ), H(4, 6 ), and I(3, − 3 ).
Solution.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
As seen in the last example, unlike in Cartesian plane where a point has a
unique Cartesian coordinate representation, a point in polar plane have infinitely
many polar coordinate representations. For example, the coordinates (3, 4) in
the Cartesian plane refer to exactly one point in the plane, and this particular
point has no rectangular coordinate representations other than (3, 4). However,
D
the coordinates (3, π3 ) in the polar plane also refer to exactly one point, but
this point has other polar coordinate representations. For example, the polar
coordinates (3, − 5π
3
), (3, 7π
3
), (3, 13π
3
), and (3, 19π
3
) all refer to the same point as
π
that of (3, 3 ).
260
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Figure 3.36
PY
Example 3.9.2. Plot the following points in one polar plane: A(−3, 4π
3
), B(−4, 11π
6
),
C(−2, −π), and D(−3.5, − 7π
4
).
O
Solution. As described above, a polar point with negative radial coordinate lies
on the opposite ray of the terminal side of θ.
C
E D
EP
D
261
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Points in Polar Coordinates
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.1
1. Plot the following points in one polar plane:
PY
A(2, − π2 ) B(3, 7π
4
) C(4, − π6 )
D(2, − 4π
3
) E(−4, π4 ) F (1, 41π
12
)
G(−3, − 2π
3
) π
H(−4, − 12 ) I(−2, − 11π
2
)
O
Answer:
C
E D
EP
D
2. Give the polar coordinates (r, θ) with indicated properties that represent the
same point as the given polar coordinates.
262
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(a) (2, π); r > 0, −2π < θ ≤ 0 Answer: (2, −π)
(b) (5, 3π
4
); r < 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (−5, − 7π 4
)
4π 2π
(c) (−5, 3 ); r < 0, −2π < θ ≤ 0 Answer: (−5, − 3 )
(d) (1, 0); r < 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (−1, π)
(e) (2, sin−1 (0.6)); r < 0, −2π < θ ≤ 0 Answer: (−2, sin−1 (0.6) − π)
(f) (−3, cos−1 (−0.4)); r > 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (3, cos−1 (−0.4) + π)
We now have two ways to describe points on a plane – whether to use the Carte-
PY
sian coordinates (x, y) or the polar coordinates (r, θ). We now derive the conver-
sion from one of these coordinate systems to the other.
We superimpose the Cartesian and polar planes, as shown in the following
diagram.
O
C
E D
EP
Figure 3.37
Suppose a point P is represented by the polar coordinates (r, θ). From Lesson
D
3.2 (in particular, the boxed definition on page 139), we know that
x = r cos θ and y = r sin θ.
Given one polar coordinate representation (r, θ), there is only one
rectangular coordinate representation (x, y) corresponding to it.
263
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Example 3.9.3. Convert the polar coordinates (5, π) and (−3, π6 ) to Cartesian
coordinates.
Solution.
x = 5 cos π = −5
(5, π) −→ −→ (−5, 0)
y = 5 sin π = 0
Teaching Notes
One can also easily √
convert the polar x = −3 cos π = − 3 3 √
coordinates (5, π)
(−3, π6 ) −→ 6 2
−→ (− 3 2 3 , − 32 ) 2
to its y = −3 sin π = − 3
corresponding 6 2
rectangular
PY
coordinates (−5, 0)
by simply plotting As explained on page 260 (right after Example 3.9.1), we expect that there
the point.
are infinitely many polar coordinate representations that correspond to just one
given rectangular coordinate representation. Although we can actually determine
all of them, we only need to know one of them and we can choose r ≥ 0.
O
Suppose a point P is represented by the rectangular coordinates (x, y). Re-
ferring back to Figure 3.37, the equation of the circle is
C p
x2 + y 2 = r 2 =⇒ r = x2 + y 2 .
that
y
tan θ = ,
x
where θ is an angle in standard position whose terminal side passes through the
point (x, y).
D
264
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(x, y) −→ (r, θ)
x6=0, y6=0
p
r= x2 + y 2
y
tan θ = x
Example 3.9.4. Convert each Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates (r, θ),
PY
where r ≥ 0.
(1) (−4, 0) (4) (6, −2)
(2) (4, 4) (5) (−3, 6)
√
O
(3) (−3, − 3) (6) (−12, −8)
polar.
√
(3) (−3, − 3) in QIII
q √ √
EP
r = (−3)2 + (− 3)2 = 2 3
√ √
tan θ = −−33 = 33 =⇒ θ = 7π
6
√ √
(−3, − 3) −→ 2 3, 7π6
D
265
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(6) (−12, −8) in QIII
p √
r = (−12)2 + (−8)2 = 4 13
−8 2 2
Teaching Notes tan θ = −12
= 3
=⇒ θ = π + tan−1 3
We may also use √
θ = tan−1 23 − π. (−12, −8) −→ 4 13, π + tan−1 23 2
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.2
1. Convert each polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates.
(a) (2, −π) Answer: (−2, 0)
√ √
(b) (4, 3π ) Answer: (−2 2, 2 2)
PY
4
(c) (6, 3π
2
) Answer: (0, −6)
√
(d) (−2, 2π3
) Answer: (2, − 3)
√
(e) (−4, 7π6
) Answer: (2 3, 2)
√
O
(f) (−3, − 2π
3
) Answer: ( 32 , 3 2 3 )
√
(g) (1, sin−1 (− 31 )) C Answer: ( 2 3 2 , − 31 )
(h) (−2, tan−1 34 ) Answer: (− 65 , − 58 )
2. Convert each Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates (r, θ), where r ≥ 0.
D
(a) (0, 6) Answer: (6, π2 )
√
(b) (3, −3) Answer: (3 2, − π4 )
√
E
√
(e) (1, 4) Answer: ( 17, tan−1 4)
√
(f) (−2, 4) Answer: (2 5, π + tan−1 (−2))
√
(g) (−6, −2) Answer: (2 10, π + tan−1 31 )
√
D
266
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Graph of a Polar Equation
The polar graph of an equation involving r and θ is the set of all
points with polar coordinates (r, θ) that satisfy the equation.
Example 3.9.5. Identify the polar graph of r = 2, and sketch its graph in the
polar plane.
PY
Solution. Squaring the equation, we get r2 = 4. Because r2 = x2 + y 2 , we have
x2 + y 2 = 4, which is a circle of radius 2 and with center at the origin. Therefore,
the graph of r = 2 is a circle of radius 2 with center at the pole, as shown below.
O
C
E D
EP
we may also identify the graph of r = 2 by observing that its graph consists of
points (2, θ) for all θ. In other words, the graph consists of all points with radial
distance 2 from the pole as θ rotates around the polar plane. Therefore, the
graph of r = 2 is indeed a circle of radius 2 as shown.
267
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
graph of θ = − 5π4
is a line passing through the pole and with angle − 5π
4
with
respect to the polar axis, as shown below.
PY
O
Example 3.9.7. Identify (and describe) the graph of the equation r = 4 sin θ.
C
Solution.
r = 4 sin θ
D
r2 = 4r sin θ
x2 + y 2 = 4y
E
x2 + y 2 − 4y =0
x2 + (y − 2)2 =4
EP
Therefore, the graph of r = 4 sin θ is a circle of radius 2 and with center at (2, π2 ).
D
268
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
? Example 3.9.8. Sketch the graph of r = 2 − 2 sin θ.
π π π π 2π 3π 5π
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
π
r 2 1 0.59 0.27 0 0.27 0.59 1 2
7π 5π 4π 3π 5π 7π 11π
x 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
2π
r 3 3.41 3.73 4 3.73 3.41 3 2
PY
O
C
E D
EP
269
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
This is a circle of radius 2 and with center at (2, π).
PY
O
(2) We construct a table of values.
C
π π π π 2π 3π 5π
x 0 6 4 3 2 3 4 6
π
D
r −4 −3.46 −2.83 −2 0 2 2.83 3.46 4
E
From the table, the microphone is most sensitive to sounds coming from
EP
Seatwork/Homework 3.9.3
D
(a) θ = 2π
3
2π
Answer: Line passing through the pole with angle 3
with respect to the
polar axis
(b) r = −3
Answer: Circle with center at the pole and of radius 3
(c) r = 2 sin θ
Answer: Circle of radius 1 and with center at (1, π2 )
270
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(d) r = 3 cos θ
Answer: Circle of radius 1.5 and with center at (1.5, 0)
(e) r = 2 + 2 cos θ Answer: A cardioid
(a) r = −3
PY
O
C
E D
(b) r = −2 sin θ
EP
D
271
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(c) r = 2 + 2 sin θ
PY
O
C
(d) r = 4 cos θ
E D
EP
D
272
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
where |r| gives the sensitivity of the microphone of a sound coming from an
angle θ (in radians).
(a) Identify and sketch the graph of the polar equation.
Answer: A cardioid
PY
O
(b) Sound coming from what angle θ ∈ [0, 2π) is the microphone most sensi-
tive to? Least sensitive?
C
Answer: Most sensitive at θ = 0; least sensitive at θ = π
D
Exercises 3.9
A(−2, π2 ) B(1, − 7π
3
) C(−2, π4 )
EP
D(−3, − 2π
3
) E(4, − π4 ) F (−3, 7π
12
)
G(4, − 8π
3
) H(−2, − 11π
12
) I(1, 15π
2
)
Answer:
D
273
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Give the polar coordinates (r, θ) with indicated properties that represent the
same point as the given polar coordinates.
(a) (−3, 2π); r > 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (3, π)
(b) (10, − 4π
3
); r < 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (−10, 5π3
)
3π π
(c) (−4, 2 ); r < 0, −2π < θ ≤ 0 Answer: (−4, − 2 )
(d) (−1, −π); r < 0, 0 < θ ≤ 2π Answer: (−1, π)
(e) (−2, cos−1 32 ); r > 0, −2π < θ ≤ 0 Answer: (2, −π + cos−1 32 )
3. Convert each polar coordinates to Cartesian coordinates.
PY
(a) (4, π) Answer: (−4, 0)
√ √
(b) (−4, 7π4
) Answer: (2 2, −2 2)
√
(c) (2, − 2π
3
) Answer: (−1, − 3)
(d) (−5, −3π) Answer: (5, 0)
O
√
(e) (8, − 11π
6
) Answer: (4 3, 4)
4. Convert each Cartesian coordinates to polar coordinates (r, θ), where r ≥ 0
and 0 ≤ θ2π.
C
(a) (0, −6) Answer: (6, 3π
2
)
√ 5π
D
(b) (−5, −5) Answer: (5 2, 4 )
√
(c) (−2, 6) Answer: (2 10, π + tan−1 (−3))
E
√
(d) (1, −4) Answer: ( 17, 2π + tan−1 (−4))
√
(e) (1, − 3) Answer: (2, 5π )
EP
274
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(b) r = −3 sin θ
Answer: A circle tangent to the x-axis with center at (0, −1.5)
PY
O
(c) r = cos θ
Answer: A circle tangent to the y-axis with center at (0.5, 0)
C
E D
EP
(d) r = 2 − 2 cos θ
D
Answer: A cardioid
275
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
(e) r = 1 + sin θ
Answer: A cardioid
PY
6. The graph of the polar equation r = 2 cos 2θ is a four-petaled rose. Sketch its
O
graph.
Answer:
C
E D
EP
equation
1.164
r=
1 + 0.967 sin θ
with respect to the sun at the pole. Find the closest distance between the sun
and the comet.
1.164
Answer: Closest distance occurs when sin θ = 1, so r = 1.967
≈ 0.59 units.
? 8. Polar equations are also used by scientists and engineers to model motion of
satellites orbiting the Earth. One satellite follows the path
36210
r= ,
6 − cos θ
276
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
where r is the distance in kilometers between the center of the Earth and the
satellite, and θ is the angular measurement in radians with respect to a fixed
predetermined axis.
(a) At what value of θ ∈ [0, 2π) is the satellite closest to Earth, and what is
the closest distance?
Answer: The satellite is closest to Earth when cos θ = −1, and this occurs
36210
when θ = π. The closest distance is, therefore, r = 6−(−1) ≈ 5182.86
kilometers.
(b) How far away from Earth can the satellite reach?
Answer: The satellite can reach as far as r = 36210
6−1
≈ 7242 km away from
the Earth.
PY
9. The graph of the polar equation
15
r=
3 − 2 cos θ
O
is a conic section. Identify and find its equation in rectangular coordinate
system. Answer: Ellipse, 5x2 + 9y 2 − 60x − 225 = 0
Solution
C
3r − 2r cos θ = 15
p x
3 x2 + y 2 − 2r · = 15
r
D
p 2
3 x2 + y 2 = (2x + 15)2
E
6
r=
3 + 3 sin θ
is a parabola. Find its equation in rectangular coordinate system.
Answer: y = − 14 x2 + 1
D
11. For what values of θ ∈ [0, 2π) will the graphs of r = 4 cos θ and r cos θ = 1
intersect? Answer: π3 , 2π
3
, 4π
3
, 5π
3
12. Convert the polar equation
2 sin 2θ
r=
cos3 θ − sin3 θ
into Cartesian equation. Answer: x3 = y 3 + 4xy
277
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
4
O
Answers to
All Exercises
C
in Supplementary Problems
and
D
4
D
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Supplementary Problems 1.1 (page 17) 5
3
7. center (−2, −4), r =
1 4. center (2, 2), r = 4
1. center (0, 0), r =
2
D
1 4
8. center
EP
3 3
,− , r = 2
4
O
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
279
10. x2 + y 2 = 75 16. (x − 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 49 26. The equation −x + 3y = 9 is equivalent to y = 13 x + 3, which implies that
the slope of the tangent line is 1/3. Thus, the equation of the line containing
11. (x − 17)2 + (y − 5)2 = 144 17. (x + 2)2 + (y − 3.5)2 = 31.25 the point of tangency (3, 4) and is perpendicular to the tangent line is y −
12. (x + 8)2 + (y − 4)2 = 20 18. (x − 1.5)2 + (y − 1)2 = 18 4 = −3(x − 3). This line contains the center, which has x coordinate 4.
Then the center is k = 4 − 3(4 − 3) = 1. The radius
13. (x − 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 49 19. (x + 10)2 + (y − 7)2 = 36 is (3 − 4)2 + (4 − 1)2 = 10. Therefore, the circle’s equation is (x − 4)2 +
p the y coordinate of √
(y − 1)2 = 10.
14. (x − 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 225 20. (x − 1)2 + (y − 1)2 = 5
27. Set up a Cartesian coordinate system by assigning C as the origin. Then the
15. (x − 15)2 + (y + 7)2 = 9
D 21. (x + 2)2 + (y − 3)2 = 12 circle on the left end has radius 100 and has equation x2 + y 2 = 10000. A
radius of the circle on the right end can be drawn from C to the upper right
22. Let A(3, 3), B(7, 1), and C(0, 2). The slope of AB is −1/2 and its midpoint corner of the figure; this radius has length (by the Pythagorean theorem)
is (5, 2). Then the perpendicular bisector to AB has equation
√ √
3002 + 1002 = 100000. Then the circle on the right end has equation x2 +
y 2 = 100000. We want the at y = 50. In this case, the
2
√
√ length of the segment
y − 2 = 2(x − 5) ⇐⇒ y − 2x + 8 = 0. left endpoint
√ has x = − √ 10000 − 50 = − 7500 and the √ right endpoint
√ has
EP
x = √100000√− 502 = 97500. Then the total length is 97500 − (− 7500)
Similarly, the slope of BC is −1/7 and its midpoint is (3.5, 1.5). Then the
perpendicular bisector to BC has equation
= 50 3 + 50 39 m ≈ 398.85 m.
28. We set up a coordinate system by making the circle’s center the origin. Since
3 7
the circle has radius 11/2 = 5.5, its equation is x2 + y 2 = 5.52 .
2
y− =7 x−
2
E
⇐⇒ y − 7x + 23 = 0.
From the conditions of the problem, the surface of the water is at y = −1 so
The center of the circle is on both perpendicular bisectors; that is, the center is the base of the boat will be at y = −2. The left and right endpoints can be
computed as follows:
0 and y − 7x + 23 = 0, we see that the center is (3, −2).
D
the intersection of these two lines. By solving the system involving y −2x+8 =
√
x2 + 4 = 5.52 ⇐⇒ x = ± 26.25
Finally, the radius of the circle can be obtained by computing the distance √ √
between the center and any of the points A, B, or C. The radius is 5; therefore, Then the boat’s maximum possible width is 26.25 − (− 26.25), which is
approximately 10.25 ft.
the circle’s equation is (x − 3)2 + (y + 2)2 = 25
C
Supplementary Problems 1.2 (page 31)
23. (x − 2.5)2 + (y − 0.5)2 = 14.5
3
2y + 3x + 5 = 0.
2
y − 2 = − (x + 3) ⇐⇒
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
p we see that the point of tangency
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
280
3 11
2. vertex (0, 0), focus (0, 5), directrix y = −5, axis x = 0 5. vertex (3, 2), focus , directrix y = , axis x = 3
2 2
3, −
D
3. vertex (−1, 7), focus (−2, 7), directrix x = 0, axis y = 7
EP
6. The equation can be simplified as follows:
(3x − 2)2 = 84y − 112
E 2
3
3 x− = 84y − 112
2
2
D 9 x−
3
2
= 84y − 112
2 28 112
3 3 9
x− = y−
2
2 28 4
C
x−
3
2
=
3
y−
3
2 4 2 11 2
vertex , , focus ,
3 3 3 3 3
, directrix y = −1, axis x =
4. vertex (−1, −1), focus
1
2
3
2
− , −1 , directrix x = − , axis y = −1
O
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
281
7. (y − 11)2 = 36(x − 7) 12. x2 = −8(y − 7) 2. center: (0, 2)
8. (x + 10)2 = −16(y + 5) 13. (y − 8)2 = −8(x + 3) foci: F1 (0, −1), F2 (0, 5)
25
9. (x + 10)2 = 34(y − 3) vertices: V1 (0, −3), V2 (0, 7)
2 14. covertices: W1 (−4, 2), W2 (4, 2)
12
≈ 2.08 ft
10. (y − 3) = 34(x + 10)
2
11. (y − 9) = −80(x − 4) D 15. ≈ 4.17 cm
16. Note that the lowest point of the rope is the vertex of the parabola. This
occurs midway between the two posts. Set up a coordinate system by making
the vertex (0, 0). Then the parabola has equation of the form x2 = 4cy and
passes through the points (4.5, 8) and (−4.5, 8). Substituting either of these 3. center: (1, 1)
points to the equation tells us that c = 4.52 /32. Therefore, the equation of √ √
4.52 foci: F1 (1 − 3, 1), F2 (1 + 3, 1)
the parabola is x2 = y.
8 vertices: V1 (−1, 1), V2 (3, 1)
EP
The x coordinates of the points 2 m from the posts are −2.5 and 2.5. Substitut-
200 covertices: W1 (1, 0), W2 (1, 2)
ing either of these values to the equation tells us that the height is
81
≈ 2.47
m
17. 3.75 cm
E
18. Set up a coordinate system by assigning the midpoint of the arch’s base as
D
the origin. Then the parabolic arch has vertex at (0, 24), opens downward,
and passes through the point (16, −24). Its equation is of the form x2 =
−4c(y − 24). By substituting x = 16 and y = 0, we get c = 8/3 and the
3
equation is x2 = − 32 (y − 24).
Since the rectangular object is 25 m wide, it will span the interval from x =
−12.5 to x = 12.5. The height of the arch at these endpoints is y = − 32
1197
3
C
×
2
12.5 + 24 =
128
≈ 9.35 m.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
282
5. center: (7, −5) 13. Recall that the unit is 100 km. The vertices of the ellipse are at (3633, 0) and
(−4055, 0). Then the center of the ellipse is at (−211, 0). Then a = 3844 and
foci:
c = 211. It follows that b2 = 14731815. The equation is
F1 (1, −5), F2 (13, −5)
vertices: V1 (−3, −5), V2 (17, −5)
(x + 211)2 y2
covertices: + = 1.
W1 (7, −13), W2 (7, 3) 14 776 336 14 731 815
14. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the√origin. Then
c = 50 and a = 56. It follows that the height at the center is b = 562 − 502 ≈
D 25.22 m.
15. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
6. center: (4, 5) a = 60 and b = 20. We want the length of the segment with endpoints (on the
2 y2
602
+ 202 = 1,
foci: ellipse) having x = 45 (or −45). The y coordinates are given by 45
2
F1 (4, −1), F2 (4, 11)
2 45
or y = ± 20 1 − 602 ≈ ±13.23. Hence, the desired width is 26.46 ft.
vertices: V1 (4, −5), V2 (4, 15)
q
EP
covertices: W1 (−4, 5), W2 (12, 5) 16. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
a = 50, b = 30, and c = 40. Since the radiation source and the target area will
be located at the foci, they should be placed at the coordinates (−40, 0) and
E (40, 0). These positions are 10 cm away from an end of the reflector.
(x + 3)2 (y + 7)2
D 1. center: (0, 0)
7. + =1 8. + =1
(x − 2)2 (y − 8)2
49 16 36 100 √ √
foci: F1 (− 181, 0), F2 ( 181, 0)
9. The center is (−9, 10) and c = 12.
√ We see that the given point (−9, 15) is vertices: V1 (−10, 0), V2 (10, 0)
a covertex, so b = 5. Then a = 52 + 122 = 13. Therefore, the equation is
+
(x + 9)2 (y − 10)2
= 1.
C asymptotes: y = ± x
9
10
169 25 O
10. The center is at (−12, −18) or (−3, −7). Since the major axis should be longer
than the minor axis, the center should be at (−3, −7) with a = 11 and b = 9.
(x + 3)2 (y + 7)2
Moreover, the ellipse is vertical. Hence, the equation is + = 1. 2. center: (0, 0)
81 121 √ √
11. Since the major axis is vertical, the center has the same x coordinate as the foci: F1 (0, − 2), F2 (0, 2)
focus and the same y coordinate as the covertex; that is, the center is (−9, 10). vertices: V1 (0, −1), V2 (0, 1)
(x + 9)2
Then c = 5, b = 10, and a2 = 125. Therefore, the equation is +
100 asymptotes: y = ±x
PY
2
= 1.
(y − 10)
125
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
12. Set up a coordinate system with the center of the ellipse at the origin. Then
x2 y2
the equation is of the form 202 + b2 = 1. The point (18, 2) is on the ellipse so
182 22
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
we have 202 + b2 = 1. The height at the center is b ≈ 4.59 ft.
283
3. center: (0, 5) 5. center: (−3, −3)
√
foci: 15),
√ √
foci: F1 (− 19, 5), F2 ( 19, 5) F1 (−3, −3 −
√
15)
√ √
vertices: V1 (− 15, 5), V2 ( 15, 5) F2 (−3, −3 +
2 vertices: V1 (−3, −3 − 6),
√
asymptotes: y − 5 = ± √ x
15 √
V2 (−3, −3 + 6)
√
6
(x + 3)
D asymptotes: y + 3 = ±
3
6. center: (−2, 4)
foci: F1 (−13, 4), F2 (9, 4)
EP
√ √
vertices: V1 (−2 − 105, 4), V2 (−2 + 105, 4)
4
(x + 2)
E D asymptotes: y − 4 = ± √
105
4. center: (8, 6)
foci: F1 (8, −4), F2 (8, 16)
vertices: V1 (8, −2), V2 (8, 14)
4
C
3
asymptotes: y − 6 = ± (x − 8) O
y2 (x + 7)2 (x + 10)2 (y + 4)2
7. =1 9. =1
144 145 81 256
− −
8. =1
(x − 6)2 (y + 2)2
9 72
−
PY
10. The intersection (11, 9) of the two asymptotes is the center of the hyperbola.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
Then the hyperbola is horizontal and a = 6. Since the slopes of the asymptotes
are ± 34 , we have ab = 43 and b = 8. Therefore, the equation is
= 1.
(x − 11)2 (y − 9)2
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
36 64
−
284
Note: The slopes of the asymptotes of a horizontal hyperbola are ±b/a. In Supplementary Problems 1.5 (page 66)
fact, the asymptotes are given by the equation
1. pair of intersecting lines 5. parabola
b
=0
(x − h)2 (y − k)2
a2 b2 a 2. ellipse 6. hyperbola
− ⇐⇒ y − k = ± (x − h).
In contrast, the asymptotes of a vertical hyperbola are given by the equation 3. parabola 7. empty set
(y − k)2 (x − h)2 a 4. point 8. circle
a2 b2 b
− = 0 ⇐⇒ y − k = ± (x − h).
D
Hence, the slopes of the asymptotes are ±a/b. This is used in the following
9. The standard equation of the ellipse is
(x − 5)2
+
(y − 2)2
= 1; so its foci
item. 36 100
are (5, 10) and (5, −6) while its vertices are (5, 12) and (5, −8). The equations
11. The intersection (−4, 8) of the two asymptotes is the center of the hyperbola. of the circles are (x − 5)2 + (y − 10)2 = 4, (x − 5)2 + (y − 10)2 = 324,
Then the hyperbola is vertical and c = 13. Since the slopes of the asymptotes
5 5
(x − 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 4, and (x − 5)2 + (y + 6)2 = 324.
are ± 12 , we have ab = 12 .
√
10. The standard equation of the hyperbola is
(x − 1)2
EP
3
Since c = 13, we have a2 + b2 = 169 and b = 169 − a2 . It follows that −y 2 = 1; its foci are (−1, 0)
a 5 and (3, 0) and the top side of its auxiliary rectangle is on the line y = 1.
= =⇒ a = 5 and b = 12 =⇒ = 1.
(y − 8)2 (x + 4)2
2 If the focus of the parabola is (−1, 0), then its vertex is (−1, 0.5) and its
√
12 25 144
−
169 − a
E
12. Note that (3, 8) is not on the given asymptote. Then two other corners of the
equation is (x + 1)2 = −2(y − 0.5). Similarly, if the focus of the parabola is
(3, 0), then its vertex is (3, 0.5) and its equation is (x − 3)2 = −2(y − 0.5).
auxiliary rectangle are on the given asymptote; one has x coordinate 3 and one
has y coordinate 8. These points are (−3, 8) and (3, 0). Their midpoint (0, 4) (y + 5)2 (x + 9)2
11. The standard equation of the hyperbola is = 1. Its auxil-
D
is the center of the hyperbola; then a = 4 and b = 3. Hence, the equation is 25
−
25
iary rectangle has corners (−14, 0), (−4, 0), (−4, −10), (−14, −10). The equa-
(y − 4)2 x2
= 1. tion of the circle is (x + 9)2 + (y + 5)2 = 50.
16 9
−
If the parabola’s directix is x = − 17, then its vertex is − 217 , 5 and its
= 1.
(x − 9)2 (y − 1)2
√
49 4
−
O
14. Situate the two stations on the Cartesian plane so that A(−75, 0) and B (75, 0).
equation is (y − 5)2 = 2 17 x + 217 . Similarly, if the parabola’s direc-
√
√ √
17
tix is x = 17, then its vertex is 2
, 5 and its equation is (y − 5)2 =
Let P represent the plane and let its coordinates be (h, 60). Since the signal
√
from B arrives earlier than the signal from b, it should follow that h > 0. −2 17 x − 217 .
Moreover, P should lie on the the right branch of the hyperbola whose equation
√ √
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
2
1+ Its graph
48 3321
482 ≈ 69.29
9 41
s
r+2
Thus, the plane is approximately 5.71 miles to the west of station B. (a) is a circle if
− √ 2 =⇒ h =
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
285
r+2
(b) is a point if = 0; that is, when r = −2.
(c) (1, 6), (1, 2)
r−1
r+2
(c) is the empty set if < 0; that is, when r ∈ (−2, 1).
r−1
y2
14. The equation simplifies to + = 1. Its graph is
(x − 4)2
m+7 2m
(a) a circle if m + 7 = 2m; that is, when m = 7.
(b) a horizontal ellipse if m + 7 > 2m > 0; that is, when 0 < m < 7.
D
(c) a vertical ellipse if 2m > m + 7 > 0; that is, when m > 7.
(d) a hyperbola if 2m(m + 7) < 0; that is, when −7 < m < 0.
(e) the empty set if m + 7 < 0 and 2m < 0; that is, when m < −7.
3 √ √
Supplementary Problems 1.6 (page 77) (d) 1,
2
, 1 − 15, −1 , 1 + 15, −1
EP
1. (a) (1, 6)
E D
C
4 9 4 89 (e) No solution
(b)
3 20
− ,−
3 20
, − ,
O
PY
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
286
Topic Test 1 for Unit 1 (page 78)
2. Note that this is equivalent to solving for t such that the system
1. (a) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are equal, the graph is a circle, a point,
or the empty set. Completing the squares, we see that the equation is
equivalent to
1 3
d(t) = 150 + 75t − 1.2t2
+ y+ = 4.
2 2
x−
has a solution. Equating the first and second equation to each other yields
d(t) = 4t2 2 2
Hence, the graph is a circle with center (0.5, −1.5) and radius 2.
D
t ≈ 16.2 seconds (note that t > 0).
3. Let (x, y) be the ordered pair that satisfies the conditions. The resulting (b) By inspection, the graph is a parabola. Completing the squares, we see
system of equations is that the equation is equivalent to (x + 2)2 = 14(y + 4). Hence, the graph
has vertex at (−2, −4) and is opening upward.
1
x2 = 2y 2 + (c) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
8 hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we see
16
EP
x2 + y 2 = 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Solving yields , , = 1.
(x − 7)2 (y + 3)2
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 4 3
, − , , − , and − , − . −
equation, we have
E
4. Using the second equation, we get y = 20
x
. Substituting this into the first Hence, the graph is a horizontal hyperbola with center at (7, −3).
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have the same sign and are unequal,
the graph is an ellipse, a point, or the empty set. Completing the squares,
20
x2 +
x
2
= 41 ⇐⇒ (x2 − 16)(x2 − 25) = 0,
D we see that the equation is equivalent to
+ = 0.
giving x = ±4 or x = ±5. Thus, the solutions are (4, 5), (−4, −5), (5, 4), and (x − 8)2 y 2
(−5, −4). 2 7
5. We have the system Hence, the graph is the point (8, 0).
C x2 y2
2. (a) The equation is equivalent to + = 1. This is a vertical ellipse.
7 25
x2 = 4ky,
x2 + (y − 6)2 = 36
O
where the first equation is a circle above the x-axis, tangent to the x-axis at
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
solution is unique, we set the discriminant to be nonpositive: 4k − 12 ≤ 0 ⇒
k ≥ 3.
If k ≤ 0, the system will always have a unique solution.
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Thus k ∈ (−∞, 0] ∪ (3, +∞).
287
(b) The equation is equivalent to = 1. This is a vertical
(y + 4)2 (x − 1)2 −3(x2 − 8x + 16) + (y + 1)2 = 36 − 48
64 36
−
hyperbola. −3(x − 4)2 + (y + 1)2 = −12
= 1.
(x − 4)2 (y + 1)2
4 12
−
Therefore, the point traces a horizontal hyperbola with center at (4, −1).
center: C(1, −4)
Topic Test 2 for Unit 1 (page 79)
foci: F1 (1, −14), F2 (1, 6)
D
vertices: F1 (1, −12), F2 (1, 6) 1. (a) By inspection, the graph is a parabola. Completing the squares, we see
that the equation is equivalent to (y − 5)2 = −8(x − 5). Hence, the graph
asymptotes: y + 4 = ± 43 (x − 1) has vertex at (5, 5) and is opening to the left.
(b) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are equal, the graph is a circle, a point,
or the empty set. Completing the squares, we see that the equation is
equivalent to (x + 5)2 + (y + 9)2 = −4. Hence, the graph is the empty
3. (a) The parabola opens to the right and has focal distance c = 6. Its equation set.
EP
(c) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 have the same sign and are unequal,
is (y − 3)2 = 24(x + 1).
(b) The intersection (−2, −5) of the two asymptotes is the center of the the graph is an ellipse, a point, or the empty set. Completing the squares,
hyperbola. Then the hyperbola is horizontal and a = 5. Using the slopes we see that the equation is equivalent to
of the asymptotes, we have ab = 12
(x + 2)2 (y + 5)2
4
E
. It follows that b = 12 and the
+
(x + 2)2 (y − 1)2
= 1.
equation is = 1. 4 9
25 144
−
Hence, the graph is a vertical ellipse with center (−2, 1).
D
4. Multiplying the first equation by 2, we get 2(x − 1)2 + 2(y + 1)2 = 10. By
subtracting the second equation from this new equation, we get the equation
(d) Since the coefficients of x2 and y 2 are of opposite signs, the graph is a
hyperbola or a pair of intersecting lines. Completing the squares, we see
that the equation is equivalent to
2(y + 1)2 + 8 = 10 − y. This has solutions y = 0 and y = −5/2.
When y = 0, the corresponding √x values are 3 and −1. When y = −5/2,
= 0.
(y − 4)2 (x − 6)2
the corresponding x values
(3, 0), ±
√
11
2
are ± 211 + 1. Therefore, the solutions are (−1, 0),
+ 1, − 52 .
C 11
−
17
Hence, the graph is a pair of intersecting lines given by the equations
5. Set up a coordinate system by making the center of the door’s base the origin. 17
y − 4 = ± 11 (x − 6).
Then the ellipse has center (0, 2) with a = 1/2 and b = 0.3; then its is equation
x2
+ (y−2)
2
= 1.
O 2. (a) The equation is equivalent to
x2 y 2
64 64
− = 1. This is a horizontal hyperbola.
0.52 0.32
To determine if the cabinet can be pushed through the doorway, we determine
2 2
the height of the doorway when x = 0.25 (or −0.25). We solve for y from the
center: (0, 0)
equation 0.25
0.52
+ (y−2)
0.32
= 1. Solving for the y coordinate, we see that the height √
is ≈ 2.2598 m. Hence, the cabinet cannot be pushed through the doorway. foci: F1 (−8 2, 0),
√
PY
6. Let (x, y) be the coordinates of the point. This point satisfies F2 (8 2, 0)
vertices: V1 (−8, 0), V2 (8, 0)
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 2|x − 3|.
p
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
x2 + (y + 1)2 = 4(x2 − 6y + 9)
288
(b) The equation is equivalent to +
(x + 3)2 (y − 2)2
= 1. This is a horizontal If Nikko stands on a 1.5-ft stool and the vertex remains at (0, 3), the line
49 4 y = −1.5 will correspond to the ground. will strike the
ellipse. √
ground when y = −1.5. This gives x = − 43 (−1.5 − 3) = 6. Therefore, the
center: C(−3, 2)
√
q Hence, the water
9
= ⇒ a1 = .
4
+
(x + 5)2 (y − 3)2
= 1. 3.
16 81 n (2(17) + (n − 1)3)
sn =
4. Completing the squares, we see that the first equation is equivalent to 9(x +
O 2
= 30705 ⇒ 3n2 + 31n − 61410 = 0
Using the quadratic formula and noting that n must be a whole number, we
3)2 = 4y 2 + 36. On the other hand, the second equation is equivalent to have n = 138.
9(x + 3)2 = 36y + 36. Subtracting the second equation from the first, we get
100[2a1 + (100 − 1)d]
4y 2 − 36y = 0, which has solutions y = 0 and y = 9. = 2a1 + 99d
2
4. 15000 = a1 + a2 + a3 + · · · + a100 =
values are −5 and −1. When y = 9, the
= (a1 + 2d) + (a1 + 5d) + (a1 + 98d)
When y = 0, the corresponding x √
5016 = a3 + a6 + · · · + a99
PY
corresponding x √
(−1, 0), −3 ± 2 10, 9 . = 33a1 + (2 + 5 + · · · + 98)d
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
33[2(2) + (33 − 1)(3)]
valuesare −3 ± 2 10. Therefore, the solutions are (−5, 0),
5. Set up a coordinate system so that the opening of the hose (the parabola’s = 33a1 +
2
·d
vertex) is at (0, 3) and that the water flows towards the positive x-axis. Then = 33(a1 + 50d)
the x-axis (y = 0) corresponds to the ground; it follows the parabola passes
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
through the point (2, 0). Hence, the equation of the parabola is x2 = − 43 (y−3).
289
Solving the system 10. Note that c1 = a and c5 = b = ar5−1 = ar4 in our geometric sequence.
1
Furthermore, the product c2 c3 c4 = (ar) (ar2 ) (ar3 ) = a3 r6 = 27, yielding
2
ar2 = 3. However, ab = a (ar4 ) = (ar2 ) = 9.
1
2a + 99d = 300
11. Note that this is a geometric series with common ratio 2n − 1. Thus, the sum
a + 50d = 152,
we get a = −48 and d = 4. will have a finite value if |2n − 1| < 1 ⇒ −1 < 2n − 1 < 1 ⇒ 0 < n < 1.
a1 Thus, n ∈ (0, 1).
5. We have s = 108 =
a1 (1 − r3 )
and s3 = 112 = = 108 (1 − r3 )
1−r 1−r
1 Supplementary Problems 2.2 (page 95)
27
⇒ r = − ⇒ a1 = 144.
D
6. If an is the nth term in the series, then 10
√ i 3 3 10 √
1. (a) = + ... + = 26 3
2 2 2 2
3·
9 3 1 3 i=3
√
X
=
3n+1 − 2n−1
an = 5
5n 5 5 5 2
− = bn − cn ,
x2i x2 x4 x6 x8 x10
n−1 n−1
(b) = + + + +
i=1
2i 2 4 8 16 32
EP X
where bn and cn are both geometric series with |r| < 1. Thus, the infinite sum
s is given by 5
(c) (−1)i xi−1 = x − x2 + x3 − x4
b1 c1 9/5 1/5 25 i=2
s= = = .
X
−
1 − rb 1 − rc
E −
1 − 3/5 1 − 2/5 6
4
7. Note that
2. (a) (x + 5) − (x + 3)2 + (x + 1)3 − (x − 1)4 = (−1)i+1 (x + 7 − 2i)i
i=1
X
10
0.123123 . . . = 0.123 + 0.000123 + 0.000000123 + · · ·
D (b)
1
3
22 32
+ 3 + 3 + ... + 3 =
= 0.123 + 0.123(0.001) + 0.123(0.001)2 + · · · , 3 4 5 11 i=1
(n + 2)3
102 X n2
27
which is an infinite geometric series with r = 0.001. Thus,
(c) a3 + a6 + a9 + . . . + a81 = a3n
i=1
0.123 =
0.123
=
41
333
.
C 150 150 150
X
150(151)
1 − 0.001
3. (a) (4i + 2) = 4 i+ 2=4 + 2(150) = 45, 600
8. We have a1 = 2, a2 = a1 + d, a3 = a1 + 2d, a7 = a1 + 6d. Since these three form i=1 i=1 i=1
2
a geometric sequence,
O X
120
X
120
X
(b)
2 + 2d 2 + 6d
i(i − 5) = (i2 − 5i) − 1(1 − 5) − 2(2 − 5)
a3 a7 i=3 i=1
= =
X X
2+d 2 + 2d
⇒ ⇒ 2d2 + 6d = 0 ⇒ d = −3 or 0,
a2 a3 120(121)(2(120) + 1)
= + 10 = 583 230
6
130 130
yielding a2 = −1 or a2 = 2, respectively.
2 130 130
= 80 ⇒ 2a1 + 3d = 40.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
Since the sum of the first two numbers are one-third of the sum of the last two =4 i2 − 9
1 i=1 i=1
X X
3
numbers, we have (a1 + a2 ) = a3 + a4 ⇒ 4a1 + 14d = 0. Combining yields
130(131)[2(130) + 1]
d = 10, and thus a1 = 5, a2 = 15, a3 = 25, a4 = 35. = + 9(130) = 741 975
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6
290
k+1
4. We have (k + 1)(k + 4)
To show: .
2
−(i + 1) = −
50 50 50
g(i) + 3f (i) 1 1 i=1
X
√
√ =√ g(i) + 3 f (i) = √ (30 + 3 · 20) = 35 2
2 2 2
!
5. s = = i=
200 − s
(i − 1) − i (1 − 2i) ⇒
2 k(k + 3)
i=1 i=1 i=1
X X X
2
=− − (k + 2)
2 2
.
2
=−
Supplementary Problems 2.3 (page 108)
3. Part 1.
1. Part 1. 1(1!) = (1 + 1)! − 1
1 1+2
EP
The formula is true for n = 1.
2 2
=2− 1
Assume: i k+1
2 2
=2− k .
i=1
X
k+1
D To show: i(i!) = (k + 2)! − 1.
i k+3 i=1
X
To show: i
2 2
= 2 − k+1 .
i=1 k+1 k
X
i=1 i=1
X
i=1
2 i=1
2 2 = (k + 1)! − 1 + (k + 1)[(k + 1)!]
X X
2 4. Part 1.
= 2 − k+1 .
2(1) − 1 = 12
2. Part 1.
1 The formula is true for n = 1.
1(1 + 3)
2
−(i + 1) = −(1 + 1) = −
i=1 Part 2.
X
PY
k
The formula is true for n = 1.
Assume:
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
(2i − 1) = k 2 .
Part 2. i=1
X
k k
k(k + 3)
Assume: . To show: (2i − 1) = (k + 1)2 .
2
−(i + 1) = −
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
i=1 i=1
X X
291
(−1)k (k + 1)
=
2
(k − 2(k + 1))
k+1 k
(−1)k+1 (k + 1)(k + 2)
(2i − 1) = (2i − 1) + 2(k + 1) − 1 = .
i=1 i=1 2
X X
2
= k + 2k + 1 7. Part 1.
= (k + 1)2 . 43(1)+1 + 23(1)+1 + 1 = 273 = 7(39)
The number is divisible by 7 for n = 1.
5. Part 1.
1 1 1
D 1−
2
= =
2 2(1)
Part 2.
Assume: 43k+1 + 23k+1 + 1 is divisible by 21.
The formula is true for n = 2. Prove: 43(k+1)+1 + 23(k+1)+1 + 1 is divisible by 21.
Part 2. 43(k+1)+1 +23(k+1)+1 +1 = 64·43k+1 +8·23k+1 +1 = 56·43k+1 +8 43k+1 + 23k+1 + 1 −
1 1 1 1 1 7
= .
2 3 k 2k
Assume: P = 1 − · 1− ··· 1 − · 1−
8. Part 1.
k−1
EP
1 1 1 1 111+2 + 122(1)+1 = 3059 = 133(23)
= .
2 k k+1 2(k + 1)
To show: 1 − ··· 1 − · 1−
The number is divisible by 133 for n = 1.
1 1
E 1
Part 2.
1−
2
··· 1 −
k+1
=P · 1−
k+1 Assume: 11k+2 + 122k+1 is divisible by 133.
2(k + 1) 9. Part 1.
52(1)+1 · 21+2 + 31+2 · 22(1)+1 = 1216 = 19(64)
6. Part 1. The number is divisible by 19 for n = 1.
(−1)1 12 =
(−1)1 1(1 + 1)
C Part 2.
2
The formula is true for n = 1. Assume: 52k+1 · 2k+2 + 3k+2 · 22k+1 is divisible by 19.
Part 2.
O Prove: 52(k+1)+1 · 2(k+1)+2 + 3(k+1)+2 · 22(k+1)+1 is divisible by 19.
k
(−1)k k(k + 1) 52(k+1)+1 · 2(k+1)+2 + 3(k+1)+2 · 22(k+1)+1 = 50 · 52k+1 · 2k+2 + 12 · 3k+2 · 22k+1 =
Assume: (−1)i i2 = .
2
12 (52n+1 · 2n+2 + 3n+2 · 22n+1 ) + 38 · 52n+1 · 2n+2
i=1
X
k+1
10. Part 1.
(−1)k+1 (k + 1)(k + 2)
i 2
To show: (−1) i = . 111 − 6 = 5
i=1
2
The number is divisible by 5 for n = 1.
X
PY
k+1 k Part 2.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
(−1)i i2 = (−1)i i2 + (−1)k+1 (k + 1)2 Assume: 11k − 6 is divisible by 5.
i=1 i=1
X X
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2
11k+1 − 6 = 11 · 11k − 11 · 6 + 11 · 6 − 6 = 11 · 11k − 6 + 60
292
k+1
11. Part 1. 1 1
101 5 Prove:
i3 k+1
≤2−
+ + 41+2 = 1029 = 3(343) i=1
3 3
X
k+1
The number is divisible by 3 for n = 1. 1 1 1 (k + 1)3 − k
i 3 k (k + 1) 3 (k + 1)3
≤ 2− + = 2− . Note that 0 < (k + 1)2 ⇒
Part 2. i=1
X
10k 5 (k + 1)2 1
.
(k + 1)3 − k
Assume: + + 4k+2 is divisible by 3. (k + 1) 3 (k + 1)3 k+1
(k + 1)2 < (k + 1)3 − k, thus 2 − <2− =2−
3 3
10k+1 5 14. Part 1. a41 = 4 < a42 = 8, hence a1 < a2 .
Prove:
3 3
D
+ + 4k+3 is divisible by 3.
Part 2
10k+1 5 k+3 10k 5 10 5 5
+ +4 = 10· + +4·4k+2 = 10 Assume: ak < ak+1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
+ + 4k+2 −6·4n+2 −9·
k
Assume: k 2 < 2k
Prove: (k + 1)2 < 2k+1
E Supplementary Problems 2.4 (page 119)
3
x
x
− 2
2
4
32
3
8
3
1
81
= − x−11/2 + 16x−8 + x−3 + x2 − x−1/2
8
27
√ 4 √
To finish the proof, we must use induction again to prove that 2k + 1 < 2k for (c) (1 + x) = 4x3/2 + x2 + 6x + 4 x + 1
k ≥ 5.
9 5 3 9 6
2. (a) 24 x,2 x
Part 1. 2(5) + 1 = 11 < 25 = 32
C 5
6
Part 2 1 10 p
(b) 6
Assume: 2k + 1 < 2k 2 2 q2
8
15 8k−45 60−5k
(e) (k + 1)st term, 215−3k x y
k
, so set 60 − 5k = 0 ⇒ k = 12 and
Thus, (k + 1)2 < 2k+1 .
15 51
PY
1 get 2−21 x
=1 12
1
13. Part 1. 1 ≤ 2 −
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
13 4k−26
Part 2 (f) (k + 1)st term, (−1)k 2k−13 x
k
, so set 4k − 26 = 2 ⇒ k = 7 and
k
1 1 13 2
Assume: 3 x
i k
≤2−
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7
get −2−6
i=1
X
293
6 k 6 8 16−2k 1
(g) (k + 1)st term, (−2)k x , so set k = 3 and get (−2)3 4. (a) x
k 3 k
−
2
=⇒ 16 − 2k = 8 =⇒ k = 4
k
k 30−k 30 70−4k 8 8 1 35
(h) (k + 1)st term, (−1) 2 y =⇒ = x8
k
, so set 70 − 4k = −2 ⇒ k = 18
4 2 8
x −
4
30
and get 212 28 28−19 28 19 27 19
18 (b) k = 19 =⇒ (n3 ) 3 n m
19 19
(−3m)19 = −
1
8 4− k 1 7
(i) (k + 1)st term, (−3)k 5. For n = k + 1:
k 2 2
x 2 , so set 4 − k = ⇒ k = 1 and get
8
D
1
+
1
+ ··· +
1
1
−3
1·3 3·5 (2(k + 1) − 1)(2(k + 1) + 1)
1 k 1 2k 2 + 3k + 1 k+1
6 3− k 1 3 6 = + = =
(j) (k + 1)st term, 2k 2k + 1 (2k + 1)(2k + 3) (2k + 1) · (2k + 3) 2k + 3
k 2 2 3
x 2 , so set 3 − k = ⇒ k = 3 and get 23
34
4. Given (4x + 3)34 = 434−k 3k
34 34−k
k
x
E , we get k such that
Topic Test 2 for Unit 2 (page 122)
k=0
34−k k 34 34
4 3
k
= 434−(k+1) 3k+1
k+1
D 2. We have a1 + a2 = 2a1 + d = 9 and a1 + a2 + a3 = 3a1 + 2d = 9 yielding
Simplifying yields
a1 = 9, d = −9. Using sn = −126, we get n = 7.
50 50
=
4 · 34! 3 · 34!
⇒ k = 14. 3. (a) (2i + 1)(i − 3) = 2i2 − 5i − 3 = 79, 472
k!(34 − k)! (k + 1)!(34 − (k + 1))!
C i=1
X
30
i=1
X
30
19 435
5. In sigma notation, we have (b) = =
k 4 2 2
(−3)k = (1 − 3)19 = (−2)19 .
i=1 i=1
r
k=0
19 O X
X i2 − 2i + 1 X i − 1
5. (a) For n = k + 1:
a3 + 1 a2 + 2
2. First, a3 = a2 + 5 = a1 + 10. Also, = . Thus, a1 = 5,
a2 + 2 a1 + 4
a2 = 10, and a3 = 15.
1 + 4 + 7 + · · · + (3(k + 1) − 2)
3k 2 + 5k + 2 (k + 1)(3k + 2)
PY
50 = + (3k + 1) = =
k(3k − 1)
2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6 (2i + 3)(i + 1)(i + 2) 2 2 2
3. We have = = 2i + 3.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
i=1
i2 + 3i + 2 (i + 1)(i + 2)
X
50 50
(b) For n = k + 1: 3(n+1) + 7(n+1)−1 + 8 = 7 (3n + 7n−1 + 8) − 4 · 3n − 6 · 8,
2i3 + 9i2 + 13i + 6
Thus, = (2i + 3) = 2700.
where 4 · 3n is divisible by 12 for n ≥ 1, and 6 · 8 = 48 = 12(4).
i2 + 3i + 2
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
i=1 i=1
X X
294
π
Supplementary Problems 3.1 (page 133) 15. θ = 20◦ = rad; A = 800 cm2
9
√ √
6 6 360 120 120 π
1. rev = rev = 432◦ cm; s = = cm
5 5 1 rev π π π 9 3
v √
u 2(800) 120 π π 40 π
9
r=u t π = √ =
11 11 2π 22π
2. rev = rev = rad
5 5 1 rev 5
16. Area AECB = Area sector BDC − Area sector ADE
1 5π 1 5π 25π
6π 24π = (8)2 = cm2
2 12 2 12 2
− (2)2
3. 216◦ = 216 = rad; s = 4 = cm
180
π 6π
5
D
5 5
3π
◦ ◦ ◦ 2 10 5
1
E
3π 135π
19. Asegment = Asector − Atriangle =
2 3
2
√ √
(6)2 − (3)(6 3) = (12π − 9 3) cm2
8. θ = 108◦ = ; r = 15 cm; A = (15)2 = cm2 20. Angle A measures 60◦ , thus triangle AOC is equilateral. Central angle BOC
5 2 5 2
measures 120◦ . The area of the shaded region is the sum of the areas of triangle
9. θ = 150 =
◦ 5π 2
; A = 15 in ; r =
2(15) 6
√
6 π
in
D AOC and sector BOC.
5π =√ =
6 π π
√
6
s
4 2 1 2π √
Area = (6) + (6)2 = (9 3 + 12π) cm2
3 2 3
5π
10. θ = , A = 32 in2
4
16
√
16 5π
C Supplementary Problems 3.2 (page 143)
in
5π 5π 33π 33π π 33π
v
u 2(32)
3 5 2 10 10 10 π
4. The tangent function is positive in QI and QIII. Cosine is negative in QII and
3
PY
QIII. Therefore, the angle θ is in QIII.
12. r = cm; s = cm; θ = 5 =
8π
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
√
13. cm 5π π 5π 3 1
3 5. is in QII. The reference angle is , and therefore P , .
6 6 6 2 2
= −
!
1 1
14. 2r = rθ =⇒ θ = 2; A = r2 θ = r2 (2) = r2
2 2
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
295
11π π 11π 1 3
√
(−3)2 + (−1)2 =
−3 −1
is in QI. The reference angle is , and therefore P = , . 14. x = −3, y = −1, r = 10; cos θ = √ , sin θ = √
10 10
3 3 3 2 2
6. − −
√ ! p
9 1 8 4
√ = =
10 10 10 5
cos2 θ − sin2 θ = −
2 13
=⇒ sec θ =
3 3
7. tan θ = − , cos θ > 0 √
√ √ √ 10
13 2 √
15. x = 2, y = −6, r = (2)2 + (−6)2 = 2 10; sec θ = 10, csc θ = −
3
sec θ + tan θ 3
−
10 80
p
3 = 17 − 4 13
= √
13 2 9 =
9 9
sec θ − tan θ sec2 θ − csc2 θ = 10 −
+
3
D
3
√ 16. 35π
4
is coterminal with 3π
4
in QII, so its reference angle is π4 .
3 34
8. tan θ = , θ is in QIII =⇒ 35π
√
2
5 5
sec θ = −
cos
4 4 2
= − cos =−
√
r 2 2 3
π
√
x 3
9. csc θ = 2, cos θ < 0; r = 2, y = 1, x = − 3; sec θ = = √ = −
− 3 √
3 3π 11π
17. cos θ = sin 2π
3
= 2
and 2
< θ < 2π =⇒ θ=
4
EP
10. cot θ = − 3 , sin θ < 0 =⇒ x = 4, y = −3, r = (4)2 + (−3)2 = 5 6
x 4 r 5 y 3
p
18. 540◦ = 360◦ + 180◦ ; sin 30◦ + sin 60◦ + sin 90◦ + · · · + sin 360◦ = 0
cos θ = = sec θ = =
r 5 x 4 r 5
sin θ = = −
sin 30◦ + sin 60◦ + sin 90◦ + · · · + sin 510◦ + sin 540◦
r 5 y
E 3 x 4 1
√
3
+1+
√
3 1 √
+ +0=2+ 3
y 3 x 4 y 3
csc θ = = − tan θ = = − cot θ = = −
2 2 2 2
= sin 390◦ + sin 420◦ + · · · + sin 540◦ = +
csc θ =
4
D 7π
√
2
√
2 √ √
f +
=⇒ r = 4, y = −1
8 2 2
−1 =− + 2 − 2 − 1 − 1 = −2
√ √
π
x = (4)2 − (−1)2 = ± 15, θ is in Quadrant IV, x = 15
x
√
15 r
√
4 15 y 1 20. All the given angles are coterminal with .
p
6
cos θ = =
r 4
sec θ = =
x 15 r
sin θ = = −
4
C π 13π 25π 109π 2 3
√
20 3
sec + sec + sec = 10 sec = 10 =
√
r y 15 x √
6 6 6
+ · · · + sec
6 6 3 3
√ !
π
y x 15 y
csc θ = = −4 tan θ = = − cot θ = = − 15
2
12. x = 7, y = −1, r = (7) + (−1) = 5 22
√
O Supplementary Problems 3.3 (page 170)
√ √ √
x 7 2 r 5 2 y 2
p
cos θ = = sec θ = = 2π
r 10 x 7 r 10
sin θ = = −
1. P = 1 = 8π
r √ y 1 x 4
y x 7 y 2π 15
csc θ = = −5 2 tan θ = = − cot θ = = −7
|a|
2. 2 b 2
3
= 3 =⇒ |a| = 6; P = = 4π =⇒ b = 23 ; |a| + b =
2 2
PY
√
13. x = −2, y = 4 =⇒ r = (−2) + (4) = 2 5 π
√ √ 3. 4π = 2 =⇒ k = 8
x 5 r y 2 5
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
p
k
√
sin θ = =
r 5 x r 5
cos θ = = − sec θ = = − 5
r √ y x 1 4. min value = −8; max value = −2
csc θ = = 52
y x y 2
tan θ = = −2 cot θ = = −
+ 2π
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. y = 3 sin 34 8π
9 3 2
− 5 = − 13
296
√
7π π 9−2 3
6. y = −2 cot 43 6
+3=
− 6 3
7. domain = R; range = 43 , 83
9. y = 3 sec 2(x − π) − 3
π π π
10. y = −2 sin 2 x + 2
− 4
+ 1 + 3 = −2 sin 2 x + 4
+4
3π
D
11. Asymptotes: x = 2
+ 2kπ, k ∈ Z
2π
12. Asymptotes: x = 3
+ 2kπ, k ∈ Z
14. d = 4 sin πt
EP
1
15. y = 8 cos 10 (t − 10π); at t = 10, y ≈ −4.32 (that is, the mass is located about
4.32 cm below the resting position)
E
π Supplementary Problems 3.4 (page 179)
3
(b) P = π, phase shift = − π6 , domain = x|x 6= + kπ, k ∈ Z , range = R
D sin x
1.
tan x − sin x
= cos
sin x sin x sin x cos x sin x
x − sin x = sin x · 1 − 1 = sec x − 1
1 1 1 sin x
2. = = =
1 cos x
C csc x − cot x
sin x sin x
−
1 − cos x
sin x
1 − cos x
4 2 4
=
sin A + cos A − cos A
sin2 A
π π 2kπ
(c) P = 4π , phase 2
, domain = 2
+ 3
,
PY
=
x|x 6= k ∈ Z , range = (sin4 A − cos4 A) + cos2 A
sin2 A
−∞, − 23 ∪ − 12 , ∞
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
π kπ
12
+ 2
,
3 shift =
=
(d) P = π, phase shift = − π6 , domain = x|x 6= k ∈ Z , range = (sin2 A + cos2 A)(sin2 A − cos2 A) + cos2 A
sin2 A
(−∞, 1] ∪ [3, ∞)
sin2 A
= = =1
(sin2 A − cos2 A) + cos2 A
2
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin A sin2 A
297
1 1 cos x + sin x csc a + sec a tan a csc a sec a tan a
csc x + sec x + 14. = +
5. = sin x cos x = sin x cos x = cos x + sin x csc2 a csc2 a 2a
= +
csc a 1
sin x cos x sin2 x − cos2 x
sin2 a
cos x sin x
−
6. = = cos
tan x − cot x
sin a
tan x + cot x sin x cos x
x sin x = sin2 x − cos2 x
sin2 x + cos2 x = sin a + (sin2 a)
+ cos2 a
cos x sin x cos x sin x = (sin a)(1 + tan2 a)
tan x + sin x
sin x
D sin x + sin x cos x
= sin a sec2 a =
sin a
sec a = tan a sec a
cos x
− sin x
7. = cos x = cos a
1 cos x 1 + cos x
csc x + cot x
+
sin x sin x sin x 1 1
15. + =
1 + cos a + 1 − cos a
sin x(1 + cos x) 1 − cos a 1 + cos a (1 − cos a)(1 + cos a)
cos x sin2 x 2 2
= = =
1 − cos2 x
1 + cos x cos x cos x = = = 2 csc2 a
sin2 a
EP
1 − cos2 a
sin x
16. =
sin3 α − cos3 α (sin α − cos α)(sin2 α + sin α cos α + cos2 α)
1 1
8. = sin α − cos α sin α − cos α
1 + tan2 x sec2 x
= cos2 x = 1 − sin2 x
= sin2 α + cos2 α + sin α cos α = 1 + sin α cos α
cos θ cot θ
E cot θ a
sin α sin α
= = =
sin θ csc2 θ 1 + cot2 θ 1 + a2
9. sin θ cos θ = sin2 θ ·
tan α cos α cos α
17. = =
sin θ
√
r
1−
1
sec2 θ
√
D 1 − tan2 α
1−
sin2 α
cos2 α
cos2 α − sin2 α
sin 2
10. sin θ cos θ = = = =
1 − cos2 θ a2 − 1
sec θ sec θ sec θ a2 sin α cos2 α
=
1 1 + sin a
α
2 2
−
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
cos a cos a cos a 19. = sin α cos α
cot α − sin α sec α
13. = = = 1 1
1 − sin a
sec α csc α
sec a + tan a 1 sin a 1 + sin a 1 + sin a
= 1 − sin a
+ cos α sin α
·
cos a cos a
=
cos2 α − sin2 α
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
sin α cos α
· cos α sin α = cos2 α − sin2 α
298
20. tan2 α sec2 α − sec2 α + 1 = tan2 α sec2 α + (1 − sec2 α) cos(α + β) = cos α cos β − sin α sin β
√ √
= tan2 α sec2 α − tan2 α 7 2 3 2 2 10 2 5
= =
10 10 10 10 5
−
√ ! √ ! √ ! !
+ kπ − B sin(x − π) + sin(x + π)
π sin
π π
sin 2 2
+ kπ sin B
+ kπ cos B − cos = sin x cos π − cos x sin π + sin x cos π + cos x sin π
=
EP
π π
cos 2
+ kπ cos B + sin 2
+ kπ sin B 2 4
= 2 sin x cos π = 2
π 3 3
(−1) = −
sin 2
+ kπ cos B
= π
sin 2
+ kπ sin B π π
E
4 3
11. sin A =
5 5
and A in QII =⇒ cos A = −
5π 5π 5π
4. cot −
12
= cot
6
−
4
=
5π
6
5π
4
D 4 3
tan
1 + tan 5π tan 5π
5 5
cos B = and B in QIV =⇒ sin B = −
4
− tan
4 4 7
√6
3 −3 −3
=
1− (1) √
(a) sin(A − B) =
5 5
−
5 5 25
= √3
−
3
3
−1
= −2 + 3
C (b) cos(A − B) =
−3
5
4
5
+
4
5
−3
5
=−
24
25
5. sin 105◦ − cos 15◦ = sin(90◦ + 15◦ ) − cos 15◦ = cos 15◦ − cos 15◦ = 0 7
7
6. tan 1875◦ = tan 75◦ = tan(45◦ + 30◦ )
O 24
(c) tan(A − B) = 25 = −
24
tan 45◦ + tan 30◦ 25
−
= ◦ ◦
1 − tan cos(A − B) < 0 and sin(A − B) > 0 =⇒ A − B in QII
√ 45 tan 30
3 √ √
1+ √ 3 6
=
√ 12. csc A = 3 and A in QI =⇒ sin A = , cos A =
√3 = 2 + 3 3 3
3 √ √
2 2
PY
3
1− √
sec B = 2 and B in QIV =⇒ sin B = , cos B =
2 2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
√
7. cot α = 7, csc β = 10, and α and β are acute √
3 2 6 2 6+2 3
=
√ √ √ √
7 2 2 10 3 2 (a) sin(A − B) =
3 2
−
3
−
2 6
=⇒ cos α = , sin α = , sin β = , cos β =
√ ! √ ! √ ! √ ! √
10 10 10 10
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
299
6 2 3 2
√ √ π 23π
+ =
2 3− 6 tan + tan
(b) cos(A − B) =
3 2 3
−
2 6 17. 9
√ ! √ ! √ ! √ !
π 23π 9 36 4
36 = tan π + 23π = tan 3π = −1
√ √
9 36
1 − tan tan
6+2 3 √
(c) tan(A − B) = √ √ =2 2+3
2 3− 6 18. sin(A + B + C) = sin(A + (B + C))
cos(A − B) > 0 and sin(A − B) > 0 =⇒ A − B in QI = sin A cos(B + C) + cos A sin(B + C)
4 5 = (sin A)(cos B cos C − sin B sin C)
13. Given: sin α = and cos β =
5 13 + (cos A)(sin B cos C + cos B sin C)
D
sin(α + β) + sin(α − β) = sin α cos β + cos α sin β + sin α cos β − cos α sin β = sin A cos B cos C + cos A sin B cos C
4 5 8
= 2 sin α cos β = 2 =
+ cos A cos B sin C − sin A sin B sin C
5 13 13
tan(A + B) = =⇒ A + B = 45 ◦ 5π 5π
1 3 (a) s = 6 = cm
1−
4 5
C
24 4
1 5π 15π
4 5 = 1
tan x + tan y 1
sin θ + cos θ + tan θ = + +2=
−2 5 − 5 10 − 3 5
=
1 − tan x tan y 3 5 5 5
3 tan x + 3 tan y = 1 − tan x tan y 12 5 12
3. sin A =
13 13 5
, A is in QII =⇒ cos A = − , tan A = −
1 1
3 tan x + 3 5 3 4 3
2 2
= 1 − tan x
PY
3 5 5 4
cos B = − , B is in QIV =⇒ sin B = − , cos B = , tan A = −
6 tan x + 3 = 2 − tan x
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
1 (a) cos(A − B) = cos A cos B + sin A sin B
tan x = −
7 5 4 12 3 56
+
13 5 13 5 65
= − − =−
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
300
12 3 2. x = 8, y = −6, r = (8)2 + (−6)2 = 10
tan A + tan B 5 4 33 2 2
−+ −
(sin θ + cos θ) = sin θ + 2 sin θ cos θ + cos2 θ
=
p
1 + tan A tan B 12 3 56
(b) tan(A − B) =
8 1
5 4 = 1 + 2 sin θ cos θ = 1 + 2 =
1+− − −6
=−
10 10 25
4 3
1 − tan tan
√
1 3
E
divided into 6 equilateral triangles. Hence, B ,
2 2
. Same coordinates
7. Connect the three diagonals of the hexagon. In doing!this, the hexagon is
3
5
4
5
6. cos A = − , A is in QIII =⇒ sin A = − , tan A =
4
3
for C, E and F , except that they will just vary in signs depending on the 24 24 7
quadrant.
1 2π
D 7 25
tan B = , B is in QIII =⇒ sin B = − , cos B = − ,
8. y = 2 sin + x+
2 3 2 3 4 7 3 24 4
− 1 =⇒ y = 2 sin −1
=
x π
5 25 5 25 5
= − − + − −
2π
3
tan A + tan B 4 24 4
+
3 7
O =−
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
3 9
(sin x − cos x)2 = =⇒ sin2 x − 2 sin x cos x + cos2 x =
π
2
π 9 9 9
=⇒ 1 − 2 sin x cos x = =⇒ −2 sin x cos x = − =⇒ sin x cos x =
= r =⇒ r = 2 cm =⇒ 2 = cm
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3 2 6 6 3
1 π 2 π π
301
9. y = tan +2 1 1 + cos t 1 + sec1 t csc t(sec t + 1)
183
−+ 2 = − tan
3
x−
6 12. cot 12 t = 1 = = 1 = = cot t(sec t + 1)
tan 2 t sin t csc t
sec t
π x 1 π
π
P = 3π, phase shift =
6 2+ 3
√ √ √
13. (a) cos 105◦ = 2
(b) tan 22.5◦ = 2 − 1
1
(c) The x−intercept of f is when x + 1 = 0, or equivalently x = −1; and the
3. cos(2t) = 8
7. cot 4θ = 1/(tan 4θ) = −7/24 y−intercept of f is y = π/4.
√ √
2− 3 2+ 3 (d)
4. sin 4θ = 2(sin θ cos3 θ − sin3 θ cos θ) 8. sin2 15◦ =
4
and cos2 15◦ = 4
5. tan x =
√
1− 5
2 9. sin2 5π
8
√
= 2+4 2 and cos2 5π
8
=
√
2− 2
4
C
2+ 2
√ √
6. tan 4θ =
4 tan θ(1 − tan2 θ)
10. cos π8 = 2
1 − tan2 θ + tan4 θ
O
1 − cos y 1 − cos y − sin y
sin y sin y
−1
tan 12 y − 1
11. = =
tan 12 y + 1 sin y sin y + 1 + cos y
+1
1 + cos y 1 + cos y
5. (a) 3π/4 (d) π 2
=
1 − cos2 y − sin y − sin y cos y
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
PY
(b) −π/6 (e) 5π/6
= (c) π/6 (f) does not exist
sin2 y − sin y − sin y cos y
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
sin2 y + sin y + sin y cos y
√ √
=
sin y − 1 − cos y
. 6. (a) (1 − 4 2)/3 (c) (2 + 3)/4
sin y + 1 + cos y √
(b) 35/17 (d) does not exist
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
302
7. Vertex angle θ should be π/3. 4. (a) (41, tan−1 (−40/9) + π) ≈ (41, 102.68◦ )
(b) (25, tan−1 (4/3)) ≈ (25, 53.13◦ )
Supplementary Problems 3.8 (page 236) (c) (8.24, tan−1 π) ≈ (8.24, 72.34◦ )
√
1. {(2k + 1)π/2 | k ∈ Z} 5. {π/8, 3π/8, 9π/8, 11π/8} (d) (14 2, −π/4)
2. ∅ 5. (a) r = 4 cos 2θ
6. {(2k + 1)π/2 | k ∈ Z}
3. {2kπ/3 | k ∈ Z}
θ 0 π/6 π/4 π/3 π/2 2π/3 3π/4 5π/6 π 7π/6 5π/4 4π/3 3π/2
4. {π/6, 5π/6, 7π/6, 11π/6}
D 7. {−π/2, π/6}
r 4 2 0 −2 −4 −2 0 2 4 2 0 −2 −4
8. {0, π/2, π, 3π/2} ∪ {π/6, π/3, 2π/3, 5π/6, 7π/6, 4π/3, 5π/3, 11π/6}
(b)
9. The bullet should be fired with an angle of θ = 60◦ .
1. (a) (13, 7π/3), (13, 13π/3) (c) (15, 7π/4), (15, 23π/4)
(b) (0, 2π), (0, π/4)
E D
2. Polar plane with plotted points:
C 6. θ = tan−1 (800/600) ≈ 53.13◦ , that is, the angle of elevation of the helicopter
O from the truck driver is 53.13◦
2 tan x
2. Hint: Use the double-angle identity for tangent tan(2x) = .
1 − tan2 x
PY
√ √
√
3
4− 6− 2
3. (a) tan 15◦ = 2 − (b) tan 7.5◦ = √ √
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
6− 2
3. (a) (−3, 0) (c) (0, 5/2) 103π π 40 9
√ √ √ 4. (a) tan−1 cot = (b) cos sin−1 =
(b) (−3 2/2, 3 2/2) 6 3 41 41
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
303
π 3π π 5π 7π 11π
√ √
5. 0, , 6. 0, π, 2π, , , ,
√
3
4− 6− 2
2 2 6 6 6 6
3. (a) tan(π/12) = 2 − (b) tan(π/24) = √ √
6− 2
√
1 3
4. cos cos−1 + cos−1 =
7. r = −2 − 2 sin θ 3 − 16 3
7 5 35
−2 −3 −2 − 2 −2 − 3 −4 −2 − 3 −2 − 2
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
625 527
1. (a) cos(2θ) = − 625 (b) sin(2θ) = − 336 (b) (x, y) = (−50 2, −50 2)
√
2. (a) cos2 24◦ ≈ 0.8346 (b) sin2 24◦ ≈ 0.1655 (c) tan2 24◦ ≈ 0.1983 (c) (x, y) = (−1, 0) (f) (x, y) = (− 15
2
, 152 3 )
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
304
References
[1] R.N. Aufmann, V.C. Barker, and R.D. Nation, College Trigonometry, Houghton
Mifflin Company, 2008.
[2] E.A. Cabral, M.L.A.N. De Las Peñas, E.P. De Lara-Tuprio, F.F. Francisco,
I.J.L. Garces, R.M. Marcelo, and J.F. Sarmiento, Precalculus, Ateneo de
Manila University Press, 2010.
PY
[4] L. Leithold, College Algebra and Trigonometry, Addison Wesley Longman
Inc., 1989, reprinted by Pearson Education Asia Pte. Ltd., 2002.
[5] M.L. Lial, J. Hornsby, and D.I. Schneider, College Algebra and Trigonometry
and Precalculus, Addison-Wesley Educational Publisher, Inc., 2001.
O
[6] J. Stewart, L. Redlin, and S. Watson, Precalculus: Mathematics for Calculus,
Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning, 2012.
C
[7] M. Sullivan, Algebra & Trigonometry, Pearson Education, Inc., 2012.
[8] C. Young, Algebra and Trigonometry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2013.
E D
EP
D
305
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.